WO2022007944A1 - 一种设备控制方法及相关装置 - Google Patents

一种设备控制方法及相关装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022007944A1
WO2022007944A1 PCT/CN2021/105455 CN2021105455W WO2022007944A1 WO 2022007944 A1 WO2022007944 A1 WO 2022007944A1 CN 2021105455 W CN2021105455 W CN 2021105455W WO 2022007944 A1 WO2022007944 A1 WO 2022007944A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
message
electronic device
aoa
signal
distance
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/105455
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
杨宇信
许浩维
饶伟炜
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP21837967.5A priority Critical patent/EP4171135A4/en
Publication of WO2022007944A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022007944A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G10—MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; ACOUSTICS
    • G10L—SPEECH ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES OR SPEECH SYNTHESIS; SPEECH RECOGNITION; SPEECH OR VOICE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES; SPEECH OR AUDIO CODING OR DECODING
    • G10L15/00—Speech recognition
    • G10L15/22—Procedures used during a speech recognition process, e.g. man-machine dialogue
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
    • H04W64/006—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management with additional information processing, e.g. for direction or speed determination
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S11/00—Systems for determining distance or velocity not using reflection or reradiation
    • G01S11/02—Systems for determining distance or velocity not using reflection or reradiation using radio waves
    • G01S11/06—Systems for determining distance or velocity not using reflection or reradiation using radio waves using intensity measurements
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S11/00—Systems for determining distance or velocity not using reflection or reradiation
    • G01S11/02—Systems for determining distance or velocity not using reflection or reradiation using radio waves
    • G01S11/08—Systems for determining distance or velocity not using reflection or reradiation using radio waves using synchronised clocks
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S13/00—Systems using the reflection or reradiation of radio waves, e.g. radar systems; Analogous systems using reflection or reradiation of waves whose nature or wavelength is irrelevant or unspecified
    • G01S13/02—Systems using reflection of radio waves, e.g. primary radar systems; Analogous systems
    • G01S13/0209—Systems with very large relative bandwidth, i.e. larger than 10 %, e.g. baseband, pulse, carrier-free, ultrawideband
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S13/00—Systems using the reflection or reradiation of radio waves, e.g. radar systems; Analogous systems using reflection or reradiation of waves whose nature or wavelength is irrelevant or unspecified
    • G01S13/74—Systems using reradiation of radio waves, e.g. secondary radar systems; Analogous systems
    • G01S13/76—Systems using reradiation of radio waves, e.g. secondary radar systems; Analogous systems wherein pulse-type signals are transmitted
    • G01S13/765—Systems using reradiation of radio waves, e.g. secondary radar systems; Analogous systems wherein pulse-type signals are transmitted with exchange of information between interrogator and responder
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S3/00—Direction-finders for determining the direction from which infrasonic, sonic, ultrasonic, or electromagnetic waves, or particle emission, not having a directional significance, are being received
    • G01S3/02—Direction-finders for determining the direction from which infrasonic, sonic, ultrasonic, or electromagnetic waves, or particle emission, not having a directional significance, are being received using radio waves
    • G01S3/14—Systems for determining direction or deviation from predetermined direction
    • G01S3/46—Systems for determining direction or deviation from predetermined direction using antennas spaced apart and measuring phase or time difference between signals therefrom, i.e. path-difference systems
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
    • G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
    • G01S5/0284—Relative positioning
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
    • G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
    • G01S5/06—Position of source determined by co-ordinating a plurality of position lines defined by path-difference measurements
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/16—Sound input; Sound output
    • G06F3/167—Audio in a user interface, e.g. using voice commands for navigating, audio feedback
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G10—MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; ACOUSTICS
    • G10L—SPEECH ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES OR SPEECH SYNTHESIS; SPEECH RECOGNITION; SPEECH OR VOICE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES; SPEECH OR AUDIO CODING OR DECODING
    • G10L15/00—Speech recognition
    • G10L15/28—Constructional details of speech recognition systems
    • G10L15/30—Distributed recognition, e.g. in client-server systems, for mobile phones or network applications
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G10—MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; ACOUSTICS
    • G10L—SPEECH ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES OR SPEECH SYNTHESIS; SPEECH RECOGNITION; SPEECH OR VOICE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES; SPEECH OR AUDIO CODING OR DECODING
    • G10L15/00—Speech recognition
    • G10L15/22—Procedures used during a speech recognition process, e.g. man-machine dialogue
    • G10L2015/223—Execution procedure of a spoken command

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular, to a device control method and a related device.
  • smart home devices are becoming more and more popular.
  • a user voice wakes up a specific smart home device at home there may be multiple smart home devices in the home to respond.
  • smart home devices cannot truly perceive the user's true intentions, they cannot achieve precise wake-up and control of multiple devices. For example: when there are multiple Huawei devices (set-top boxes, speakers, TVs, etc.) in the home, and the user calls the Huawei device "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi", all Huawei devices that receive the user's voice command may wake up and respond, causing serious damage to the user. troubled.
  • a user intends to connect and pair with a specific smart home device through a mobile phone the user needs to perform tedious manual operations for pairing multiple smart home devices.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a device control method and a related device, which can realize coordinated control among multiple devices through simple operations, and effectively improve user experience.
  • the present application provides a device control method, the method is applied to a communication system, and the communication system includes: a first device, a second device, a third device, a first device, a second device, and a third device
  • the devices communicate using short-range wireless communication technology, including:
  • the second device sends the first message; the first message carries the identifier of the second device; the third device sends the second message; the second message carries the identifier of the third device; the first device determines the second device based on the received first message
  • the angle of arrival (Angle of Arrival, AOA) of the signal the first device determines the signal AOA of the third device based on the received second message; the first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device.
  • the second device sends a third message; the second device performs a response operation in response to the received third message.
  • the present application provides a data sharing method.
  • the first device can obtain the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device respectively according to the messages sent by the second device and the third device, and then can obtain the signal AOA of the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device. and the signal AOA of the third device, determine the target device (eg, the second device) of the first device, and the second device performs a response operation through the third message. In this way, coordinated control among multiple devices can be achieved through simple operations, which effectively improves user experience.
  • the sending of the first message by the second device includes: the second device sends the first message in response to the detected voice command; the third device sends the second message, including: the third device In response to the detected voice command, a second message is sent; the second device performs a response operation in response to the received third message, including: the second device outputs response information in response to the received third message and the voice command.
  • the second device and the third device can initiate AOA measurement in response to the above-mentioned voice command, and the target device determined based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device can also respond to the above-mentioned voice command. Therefore, a simple operation can Accurately control the target device in the second device and the third device.
  • the method before the second device sends the first message, and before the third device sends the second message, the method further includes: the first device sends a fourth message in response to the detected voice instruction, the fourth message Carrying the identifier of the first device; sending the first message by the second device includes: the second device sends the first message to the first device based on the fourth message; the third device sends the second message, including: the third device is based on The fourth message is to send a second message to the first device; the second device performing a response operation in response to the received third message includes: the second device outputs response information in response to the received third message and the voice command.
  • the first device can initiate AOA measurement in response to the above-mentioned voice command, and the target device determined based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device can also respond to the above-mentioned voice command. Therefore, the second device can be accurately controlled by a simple operation. device and the target device in the third device.
  • the method further includes: the first device sends a fourth message in response to the detected first user operation, and the third device sends a fourth message.
  • the fourth message carries the identifier of the first device; the second device sending the first message includes: the second device sends the first message to the first device based on the fourth message; the third device sends the second message, including: the third The device sends the second message to the first device based on the fourth message.
  • the first device can initiate AOA measurement in response to the first user's operation, and the target device determined based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device can also respond to the above-mentioned voice command. Therefore, the second device can be accurately controlled by a simple operation. device and the target device in the third device.
  • the above-mentioned first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the received first message, and the first device determines the signal AOA of the third device based on the received second message, including: In response to the received first user operation, the first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the received first message, and determines the signal AOA of the third device based on the received second message.
  • the second device and the third device can periodically initiate AOA measurement, and when the first device detects the operation of the first user, the first device can determine whether the second device and the third device are based on the messages sent by the second device and the third device.
  • the signal AOA of the third device, the target device determined based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device can also respond to the above voice command, so the target device in the second device and the third device can be accurately controlled through simple operations.
  • the method further includes: the first device based on the received first device The message determines the distance of the second device; the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the received second message; the first device sends the second device to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device.
  • Three messages including: the first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, and the distance of the third device.
  • the method further includes: the first device based on the received first device The message determines the received signal strength indication (Received Signal Strength Indication, RRSI) of the second device; the first device determines the RRSI of the third device based on the received second message; the first device is based on the second device.
  • RRSI Received Signal Strength Indication
  • the signal AOA and the third device The signal AOA of the device sends a third message to the second device, including: the first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the The distance and the RRSI of the third device, send a third message to the second device.
  • the target device in the second device and the third device can be determined from the three dimensions of signal AOA, distance and RRSI, which improves the possibility of accurately controlling the target device in multiple devices.
  • the above-mentioned first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, including: the first device determines the second device and the third device.
  • the first device sends a third message to the second device.
  • the target device can be determined according to the signal AOA of the second device and the third device.
  • the above-mentioned first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, and the distance of the third device, including :
  • the signal AOA difference between the second device and the third device is greater than the first threshold, and the first device determines that the device with the smallest signal AOA among the second device and the third device is the second device, the first device sends the second device to the second device.
  • the target device can be determined according to the signal AOA of the second device and the third device and the distance between the second device and the third device.
  • the above-mentioned first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, and the distance of the third device.
  • sending a third message to the second device includes: when the RRSI of the second device is greater than the preset RRSI and the RRSI of the third device is less than or equal to the preset RRSI, sending the third message to the second device by the first device; or , when both the RRSI of the second device and the RRSI of the third device are greater than or equal to the preset RRSI, and the AOA difference between the signals of the second device and the third device is greater than the first threshold, the first device determines that the second device and the In the third device, the device with the smallest signal AOA is the second device, and the first device sends a third message to the second device; or, when the RRSI of the second device and the RRSI of the third device are both greater than or both less than or equal to the preset RRSI, And when the signal AOA difference between the second device and the third device is less than or equal to the second threshold, the first device determines that the device with the smallest distance between the second device and the third device
  • the above-mentioned first device determines the distance of the second device based on the received first message; before the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the received second message, the method further includes:
  • the first device receives the first message and sends the fifth message to the second device; the second device receives the fifth message and sends the sixth message to the first device; the first device receives the second message and sends it to the second device
  • Determining the distance of the third device includes: the first device determines the distance of the second device based on the sending and receiving moments of the first message, the fifth message and the sixth message; the first device determines the distance of the second device based on the second message, the seventh message and the eighth message The time of sending and receiving is determined, and the distance of the third device is determined.
  • the distance of the second device is determined based on the sending and receiving moments of the first message, the fifth message and the sixth message, and the distance of the third device is determined based on the sending and receiving moments of the second message, the seventh message and the eighth message, which can improve the distance measurement. accuracy.
  • the method further includes: the first device sends the ninth message to the second device; the second device receives the The ninth message; the first device determines the distance of the second device based on the first message, the fifth message and the sixth message, including: the first device is based on the sending and receiving of the first message, the fifth message, the sixth message and the ninth message At the moment, the distance of the second device is determined.
  • the distance of the second device is determined based on the time of sending and receiving the first message, the fifth message and the sixth message, and the distance of the second device is determined based on the time of sending and receiving the first message, the fifth message, the sixth message and the ninth message,
  • the accuracy of distance measurement can be improved.
  • the above-mentioned sixth message carries the moment when the second device sends the first message, receives the fifth message, and sends the sixth message.
  • the above-mentioned sixth message carries the time when the second device sends the first message, receives the fifth message, receives the ninth message, and sends the sixth message.
  • the method further includes: the fourth device sends the tenth message;
  • the tenth message carries the identity of the fourth device;
  • the first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the fourth device based on the received tenth message;
  • the first device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, sends the information to the third device.
  • the second device sends the third message, including: the first device sends the third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, and the signal AOA of the fourth device.
  • the method further includes: the first device is based on the received tenth The message determines the distance and RRSI of the fourth device; the first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, including: the first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device , the distance of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device and the distance of the third device, and send a third message to the second device.
  • the method before the first device sends the third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, the method further includes: the first device based on the received first device The message determines the received signal strength indication RRSI of the second device; the above-mentioned first device determines the RRSI of the third device based on the received second message; the first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, to the third device.
  • the second device sends a third message, including: the first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, and the RRSI of the third device , the distance of the fourth device, and the RRSI of the fourth device, and send a third message to the second device.
  • the first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, the distance of the third device.
  • the RRSI, the distance of the fourth device, and the RRSI of the fourth device send a third message to the second device, including: when only the RRSI of the second device is greater than the preset RRSI among the second device, the third device, and the fourth device, The first device sends a third message to the second device; or, when the number of devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI in the second device, the third device, and the fourth device is greater than 1, determine that the second device, the third device, and the fourth device Among the devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI, the two devices whose signal AOA is closest to the preset angle; when the number of devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI in the second device, the third
  • the two devices whose signal AOA is closest to the preset angle when the difference between the signal AOAs of the two devices is greater than the first threshold, determine the device with the smallest signal AOA among the two devices as the second device,
  • the first device sends a third message to the second device; or, when the number of devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI in the second device, the third device, and the fourth device is greater than 1, determine that the second device, the third device, and the fourth device Among the devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI, the two devices whose signal AOA is closest to the preset angle; when the number of devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI in the second device, the third device, and the fourth device is equal to zero, determine the second device, the third device, and the fourth device.
  • a device sends a third message to the second device.
  • the present application provides a data sharing method, comprising: a first device receiving a first message sent by a second device; the first message carrying an identifier of the second device; the first device receiving a first message sent by a third device Two messages; the second message carries the identity of the third device; the first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the first message; the first device determines the signal AOA of the third device based on the second message; the first device determines the signal AOA of the third device based on the first message The signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device send a third message to the second device; the third message is used to instruct the second device to perform a response operation.
  • the present application provides a data sharing method.
  • the first device can obtain the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device respectively according to the messages sent by the second device and the third device, and then can obtain the signal AOA of the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device. and the signal AOA of the third device, determine the target device (eg, the second device) of the first device, and the second device performs a response operation through the third message. In this way, coordinated control among multiple devices can be achieved through simple operations, which effectively improves user experience.
  • the above-mentioned first message is sent by the second device in response to the detected voice command; the second message is sent by the second device in response to the detected voice command; the third message is used to indicate The second device outputs response information in response to the voice command.
  • the second device and the third device can initiate AOA measurement in response to the above-mentioned voice command, and the target device determined based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device can also respond to the above-mentioned voice command. Therefore, a simple operation can Accurately control the target device in the second device and the third device.
  • the method further includes: the The first device sends a fourth message in response to the detected voice command, where the fourth message carries the identifier of the first device; the first message is sent by the second device based on the fourth message ; the second message is sent by the third device based on the fourth message; the third message is used to instruct the second device to output response information in response to the voice command.
  • the first device can initiate AOA measurement in response to the above-mentioned voice command, and the target device determined based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device can also respond to the above-mentioned voice command. Therefore, the second device can be accurately controlled by a simple operation. device and the target device in the third device.
  • the method further includes: the first device responding to the detected The first user operates to send a fourth message, where the fourth message carries the identifier of the first device; the first message is sent by the second device based on the fourth message; the second message is sent by the third device based on the fourth message.
  • the first device can initiate AOA measurement in response to the first user's operation, and the target device determined based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device can also respond to the above-mentioned voice command. Therefore, the second device can be accurately controlled by a simple operation. device and the target device in the third device.
  • the first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the first message; the first device determines the signal of the third device based on the second message
  • the AOA includes: in response to the received first user operation, the first device determining an angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the first message, and determining the third device based on the second message The device's signal AOA.
  • the second device and the third device can periodically initiate AOA measurement, and when the first device detects the operation of the first user, the first device can determine whether the second device and the third device are based on the messages sent by the second device and the third device.
  • the signal AOA of the third device, the target device determined based on the signal AOA of the second device and the third device can also respond to the above voice command, so the target device in the second device and the third device can be accurately controlled through simple operations.
  • the method further includes: the first device determines the first device based on the first message. The distance of the second device; the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the second message; the first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, including: A device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, and the distance of the third device.
  • the target device in the second device and the third device can be determined from the two dimensions of the signal AOA and the distance, which improves the possibility of accurately controlling the target device in multiple devices.
  • the method further includes: the first device determines the first device based on the first message.
  • the received signal strength of the second device indicates the RRSI;
  • the first device determines the RRSI of the third device based on the second message;
  • the first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device , including: the first device sends to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device and the RRSI of the third device Third message.
  • the target device in the second device and the third device can be determined from the three dimensions of signal AOA, distance and RRSI, which improves the possibility of accurately controlling the target device in multiple devices.
  • the above-mentioned first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, including: the first device determines the second device and the third device.
  • the first device determines the second device and the third device.
  • a third message is sent to the second device.
  • the target device can be determined according to the signal AOA of the second device and the third device.
  • the above-mentioned first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, and the distance of the third device, including :
  • the signal AOA difference between the second device and the third device is greater than the first threshold, and the first device determines that the device with the smallest signal AOA among the second device and the third device is the second device, send the third device to the second device. or, when the signal AOA difference between the second device and the third device is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the first device determines that the device with the smallest distance between the second device and the third device is the second device, send the second device to the second device.
  • Send a third message In this way, the target device can be determined according to the signal AOA of the second device and the third device and the distance between the second device and the third device.
  • the above-mentioned first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, and the distance of the third device.
  • sending a third message to the second device includes: when the RRSI of the second device is greater than the preset RRSI and the RRSI of the third device is less than or equal to the preset RRSI, sending the third message to the second device; or, when the RRSI of the third device is less than or equal to the preset RRSI;
  • the first device determines that the second device and the third device The device with the smallest signal AOA is the second device, and sends a third message to the second device; or, when the RRSI of the second device and the RRSI of the third device are both greater than or equal to the preset RRSI, and the second device and the third device are both greater than or equal to the preset RRSI.
  • the first device determines that the device with the smallest distance between the second device and the third device is the second device, and sends a third message to the second device.
  • the target device can be determined according to the signal AOA of the second device and the third device, the distance between the second device and the third device, and the RRSI of the second device and the third device.
  • the above-mentioned first device determines the distance of the second device based on the first message; before the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the second message, the method further includes: the first device is based on the received first device.
  • the first device determines the distance of the second device based on the first message; the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the second message, including: the first device based on the first message, the fifth message and the time of sending and receiving the sixth message to determine the distance of the second device; the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the sending and receiving time of the second message, the seventh message and the eighth message.
  • the distance of the second device is determined based on the sending and receiving moments of the first message, the fifth message and the sixth message, and the distance of the third device is determined based on the sending and receiving moments of the second message, the seventh message and the eighth message, which can improve the distance measurement. accuracy.
  • the method before the above-mentioned first device receives the sixth message sent by the second device, the method further includes: the first device sends a ninth message to the second device; the above-mentioned first device is based on the first message, the fifth The time of sending and receiving the message and the sixth message, and determining the distance of the second device includes: the first device determining the distance of the second device based on the sending and receiving time of the first message, the fifth message, the sixth message and the ninth message.
  • the distance of the second device is determined based on the time of sending and receiving the first message, the fifth message and the sixth message, and the distance of the second device is determined based on the time of sending and receiving the first message, the fifth message, the sixth message and the ninth message,
  • the accuracy of distance measurement can be improved.
  • the above-mentioned sixth message carries the moment when the second device sends the first message, receives the fifth message, and sends the sixth message.
  • the above-mentioned sixth message carries the time when the second device sends the first message, receives the fifth message, receives the ninth message, and sends the sixth message.
  • the present application provides a terminal, the terminal is a first device, and the terminal includes: a processor, a short-range wireless communication module, and a memory; wherein the processor and the memory are coupled, and the processor is connected to the short-range wireless communication
  • the communication module is connected; the short-range wireless communication module is used for receiving the first message sent by the second device; the first message carries the identifier of the second device; the short-range wireless communication module is also used for receiving the first message sent by the third device.
  • the second message carries the identifier of the third device; the above-mentioned processor is used to determine the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the first message; the above-mentioned processor is also used to determine the signal of the third device based on the second message AOA; the processor is further configured to determine the second device as the target device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device; the short-range wireless communication module is further configured to send a third message to the second device ; The third message is used to instruct the second device to perform a response operation.
  • the above-mentioned terminal further includes: two UWB antennas, the short-range wireless communication module is a UWB communication module, and the UWB communication module is connected to the two UWB antennas; the above-mentioned short-range wireless communication module is specifically used to pass The two UWB antennas receive the first message sent by the second device; the above-mentioned short-range wireless communication module is specifically used to receive the second message sent by the third device through the two UWB antennas; the above-mentioned processor is specifically used for based on the first message
  • the phase difference on the two UWB antennas determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device; the above processor is specifically configured to determine the signal AOA of the third device based on the phase difference of the second message on the two UWB antennas;
  • the above-mentioned first message is sent by the second device in response to the detected voice command; the second message is sent by the second device in response to the detected voice command; the third message is used to indicate The second device outputs response information in response to the voice command.
  • the above-mentioned processor is further configured to: respond to the detected The voice command sends a first command to the short-range wireless communication module; the above-mentioned short-range wireless communication module is further configured to send a fourth message based on the first command, and the fourth message carries the identifier of the first device; the The first message is sent by the second device based on the fourth message; the second message is sent by the third device based on the fourth message; the third message is used to indicate the second message The device outputs response information in response to the voice command.
  • the above-mentioned processor is further configured to: respond to the detected The first user operates to send a first command to the short-range wireless communication module; the above-mentioned short-range wireless communication module is also used to send a fourth message based on the first command, and the fourth message carries the identifier of the first device; the first message is the second The device is sent based on the fourth message; the second message is sent by the third device based on the fourth message.
  • the above-mentioned processor is specifically configured to: in response to the received first user operation, determine the angle of arrival AOA of the signal of the second device based on the first message, and based on the The second message determines the signal AOA of the third device.
  • the processor before determining that the second device is the target device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, the processor is further configured to: determine, based on the first message, the distance; determining the distance of the third device based on the received second message; the above-mentioned processor is specifically used for: based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device and the distance of the third device , and determine that the second device is the target device.
  • the processor before determining that the second device is the target device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, the processor is further configured to: determine the first message based on the received first message The received signal strength of the second device indicates the RRSI; the RRSI of the third device is determined based on the received second message; the above-mentioned processor is specifically configured to: based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, and the RRSI of the second device , the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, and the RRSI of the third device, to determine that the second device is the target device.
  • the above-mentioned processor is specifically configured to: determine the second device whose signal AOA is closest to 0 degrees among the second device and the third device as the target device.
  • the above-mentioned processor is specifically configured to: when the signal AOA difference between the second device and the third device is greater than the first threshold, determine the first device with the smallest signal AOA between the second device and the third device.
  • the second device is the target device; when the signal AOA difference between the second device and the third device is less than or equal to the second threshold, the second device with the smallest distance between the second device and the third device is determined as the target device.
  • the above processor is specifically configured to: when the RRSI of the second device is greater than the preset RRSI, and the RRSI of the third device is less than or equal to the preset RRSI, determine that the second device is the target device; when When both the RRSI of the second device and the RRSI of the third device are greater than or equal to the preset RRSI, and the AOA difference between the signals of the second device and the third device is greater than the first threshold, it is determined that the signals in the second device and the third device are The second device with the smallest AOA is the target device; when the RRSI of the second device and the RRSI of the third device are both greater than or equal to the preset RRSI, and the signal AOA difference between the second device and the third device is less than or equal to the second threshold , determine the second device with the smallest distance between the second device and the third device as the target device.
  • the above-mentioned short-range wireless communication module is further configured to:
  • the short-range wireless communication module is also used for receiving the sixth message sent by the second device; the short-range wireless communication module is also used for receiving the second After the message, the seventh message is sent to the third device; the above-mentioned short-range wireless communication module is further configured to receive the eighth message sent by the third device; the above-mentioned processor is specifically used for: based on the first message, the fifth message and the first message
  • the distance to the second device is determined based on the sending and receiving moments of the sixth message; the distance to the third device is determined based on the sending and receiving moments of the second message, the seventh message, and the eighth message.
  • the above-mentioned short-range wireless communication module is further configured to: before receiving the sixth message sent by the second device, send a ninth message to the second device; the above-mentioned processor is specifically configured to: based on The time of sending and receiving the first message, the fifth message, the sixth message and the ninth message determines the distance of the second device.
  • the above-mentioned sixth message carries the moment when the second device sends the first message, receives the fifth message, and sends the sixth message.
  • the above-mentioned sixth message carries the time when the second device sends the first message, receives the fifth message, receives the ninth message, and sends the sixth message.
  • the present application provides a chip system, which can be set in a first device, a second device, and a third device.
  • the chip system includes: a processor and a UWB chip.
  • the UWB chip can receive the first message sent by the second device through the UWB antenna; the first message carries the identifier of the second device; the UWB chip can also receive the second message sent by the third device through the UWB antenna; the second message carrying the identifier of the third device;
  • the above-mentioned processor is used to determine the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the first message; the above-mentioned processor is also used to determine the signal AOA of the third device based on the second message; the above-mentioned processor, It is also used to determine the second device as the target device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device; the UWB chip can also send a third message to the second device through the UWB
  • the present application provides a chip system, which can be set in a first device.
  • the first device measures the signal AOA of the second device and the third device through the UWB positioning measurement technology.
  • the first terminal may determine the target device (eg, the second device) of the first device according to the signal AOA of the second device and the third device, and perform a response operation by the second device through the third message.
  • the target device eg, the second device
  • the target device eg, the second device
  • the present application provides a communication device including one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories are coupled to the one or more processors for storing computer program code comprising computer instructions which, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the communication apparatus to perform A device control method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect above.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the communication device is made to execute the device control method in any of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects .
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, enables the computer to execute the device control method in any of the possible implementations of any of the foregoing aspects.
  • FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B are schematic diagrams of a voice interaction scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3A is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3B is a schematic diagram of a coordinate system of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3C to FIG. 3E are schematic diagrams of UWB antenna distribution according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5A is a schematic flowchart of a device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5B is a schematic diagram of a ranging algorithm 1 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5C is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5D is a schematic diagram of a signal AOA provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5E is a schematic diagram of a ranging algorithm 2 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5F is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5G is a schematic flowchart of determining a target device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5H is another schematic flowchart of determining a target device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6A is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6B is a schematic diagram of a ranging algorithm 3 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6C is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6D is a schematic diagram of a ranging algorithm 4 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6E is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of a pairing connection scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 7B to 7E are schematic interface diagrams of a pairing connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7F is a schematic diagram of another pairing connection scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 7G is a schematic interface diagram of another pairing connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 8B is a schematic diagram of another ranging algorithm 3 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 8C is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 8D is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 8E is a schematic diagram of another ranging algorithm 2 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 8F is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 9A is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram of another ranging algorithm 2 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 9C is a schematic flowchart of another device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9D is a schematic diagram of another ranging algorithm 1 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B are schematic diagrams of software architecture provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • 10C is a schematic structural diagram of a hardware system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10D is a schematic structural diagram of a UWB chip system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are only used for descriptive purposes, and should not be construed as implying or implying relative importance or implying the number of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the “multiple” The meaning is two or more.
  • smart home devices are becoming more and more popular, and there may be multiple smart home devices in a user's house, such as speakers, televisions, and air conditioners.
  • a plurality of smart home devices in a certain area can access a network (eg, a local area network, the Internet, etc.) to realize interaction with the cloud or other devices.
  • a network eg, a local area network, the Internet, etc.
  • Users can obtain online or local information through smart home devices.
  • smart home devices such as speakers and TVs to obtain news, weather, travel, play songs, and shop online.
  • the user can also control other smart home devices by specifying the smart home device.
  • the user can control the speaker to switch lights and curtains on and off.
  • users can interact with smart home devices through voice, gestures, etc. For example, users can wake up smart home devices through voice, and then control the device through voice, gestures, etc.
  • an electronic device capable of using voice interaction usually includes a microphone and has a voice recognition capability, so as to implement voice recognition on the collected ambient sound.
  • the application processor (Application Processor, AP) of the smart home device is kept powered on, and the microphone sends the collected voice information to the AP.
  • the AP recognizes the above voice information, and can perform operations corresponding to the above voice information. For example, when the AP recognizes that the above-mentioned voice information includes a preset wake-up word, it generates corresponding response information (for example, the voice information "I'm here").
  • the microphone of the electronic device is connected to the microprocessor, the microprocessor is kept powered on, and the AP of the electronic device is not powered on.
  • the microphone sends the collected voice information to the microprocessor, and the microprocessor recognizes the voice information and determines whether to wake up the AP according to the voice information, that is, power on the AP.
  • the microprocessor recognizes that the above-mentioned voice information includes a preset wake-up word, it wakes up the AP.
  • the preset wake-up word may be preset by the electronic device before leaving the factory, or may be preset by the user in the electronic device according to the user's own needs, which is not specifically limited here.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a device control method.
  • a user speaks a voice command (eg, a preset wake-up word)
  • the user points the electronic device 100 to a target device among a plurality of nearby smart home devices.
  • the smart home device that receives and recognizes the above voice command initiates the measurement of the orientation parameter.
  • the target device pointed by the user can be determined according to the orientation parameters of multiple smart home devices, and the target device responds to the user's wake-up.
  • the orientation parameters of the smart home device may include the distance between the device and the electronic device 100, the signal AOA of the device on the electronic device 100, and the received signal strength indicator (RSSI). Whether there is obstruction between the electronic devices 100 .
  • the proposed method can improve the possibility of accurately controlling home devices and improve user experience.
  • FIG. 1A there are multiple smart home devices near the user, such as a speaker 201 , a refrigerator 202 , a TV 203 , and an air conditioner 204 .
  • a speaker 201 for example, the speaker 201, the refrigerator 202, the TV 203, and the air conditioner 204 have the same wake word (for example, "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi").
  • the user points the electronic device 100 (eg, smart bracelet) to the speakers 201 and speaks the wake-up word "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi" of the speakers 201 .
  • the devices that receive and detect the wake-up word among the above-mentioned multiple smart home devices respectively initiate the measurement of orientation parameters (ie, orientation parameters relative to the smart bracelet).
  • the electronic device 100 After determining that the target device pointed by the user is the speaker 201 according to the orientation parameters of a plurality of smart home devices, the electronic device 100 sends instruction information to the speaker 201 to instruct the speaker 201 to respond to the user's wake-up word.
  • the speaker 201 sends out a voice message “I am here”.
  • the speaker 201 after the speaker 201 responds to the user's wake-up, the speaker will respond to the user's instructions (eg, voice instructions, gesture instructions, etc.) to interact with the user until the user wakes up other smart home devices.
  • the user after hearing the response of the speaker, the user speaks "Longgang's weather today".
  • Multiple smart home devices can receive and detect the voice information "Longgang today's weather”, only the awakened speaker 201 can query the Longgang today's weather through the network according to the above voice information "Longgang today's weather”, and send a voice message according to the query result " Longgang is sunny today, 25 degrees to 32 degrees, and the southerly wind is level 3.”
  • FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B are only used to illustrate a multi-device scenario, and are not intended to limit the application. In various implementation scenarios, different numbers from those shown in the figures may be included. and/or different types of devices, for example, may include more or fewer devices, or other devices than those shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B .
  • the following introduces a communication system (eg, a smart home system) provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the smart home system can connect various devices in the home (such as audio and video equipment, air conditioning control, lighting system, curtain control, digital cinema system, etc.) through the Internet of Things technology to provide home appliance control, lighting control, indoor and outdoor remote control, environmental Monitoring and timing control and other functions and means.
  • the user can also control various devices in the home through the smart home APP installed on the electronic device 100 (eg, mobile phone, smart bracelet, etc.).
  • FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a communication system 300 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 300 includes an electronic device 100 , an electronic device 201 , an electronic device 202 , an electronic device 203 , an electronic device 204 , and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 can assist the user in selecting and controlling various smart home devices (eg, speakers, televisions, refrigerators, air conditioners, etc.) in the home. in,
  • the electronic device (such as electronic device 100, electronic device 201, electronic device 202, electronic device 203 or electronic device 204) has an ultra wide band (UWB) communication module, and may also have a Bluetooth communication module, a WLAN communication module and an infrared communication module One or more of the modules.
  • UWB ultra wide band
  • the electronic device 100 can detect and scan electronic devices (such as electronic device 201, electronic device 202, electronic device 203, or electronic device 204), so that the electronic device 100 can discover nearby electronic devices through one or more short-range wireless communication protocols among UWB, Bluetooth, WLAN, and infrared, and communicate with nearby electronic devices.
  • the electronic device of the device establishes a wireless communication connection and can transmit data to the nearby electronic device.
  • the electronic device in the embodiments of the present application may be Cell phones, wearables (eg, smart bracelets), tablets, laptops, handheld computers, notebooks, ultra-mobile personal computers (UMPCs), cellular phones, personal digital assistants Portable devices such as (personal digital assistant, PDA), augmented reality (Augmented reality, AR) ⁇ virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) devices. It can also be a speaker, a TV, a refrigerator, an air conditioner, a vehicle-mounted device, a printer, a projector, and other devices. Exemplary embodiments of electronic devices include, but are not limited to, onboard Or other electronic devices with operating systems.
  • the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 , the electronic device 203 and the electronic device 204 may communicate directly.
  • the electronic device 100, the electronic device 201, the electronic device 202, the electronic device 203, and the electronic device 204 may be connected to a local area network (local area network) through a wired or wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) connection. , LAN).
  • a local area network local area network
  • wireless fidelity wireless fidelity, WiFi
  • LAN local area network
  • electronic device 100, electronic device 201, electronic device 202, electronic device 203, and electronic device 204 are all connected to the same electronic device 301, and electronic device 100, electronic device 201, electronic device 202, electronic device 203, and electronic device 204 may Indirect communication through electronic device 301 .
  • the electronic device 301 can be one of the electronic device 100, the electronic device 201, the electronic device 202, the electronic device 203 and the electronic device 204, and can also be an additional third-party device, such as a router, a cloud server, a gateway, a smart device control device, etc.
  • the cloud server may be a hardware server, and may also be embedded in a virtualized environment.
  • the cloud server may be a virtual machine executed on a hardware server that may include one or more other virtual machines.
  • the electronic device 301 can send data to the electronic device 100, the electronic device 201, the electronic device 202, the electronic device 203, and the electronic device 204 through the network, and can also receive the electronic device 100, the electronic device 201, the electronic device 202, the electronic device 203, and the electronic device. 204 data sent.
  • Electronic device 301 may include memory, a processor, and a transceiver.
  • the memory can be used to store the voice wake-up word and related programs of UWB positioning; the memory can also be used to store the orientation parameters of the electronic device (for example, the electronic device 201) obtained through the UWB positioning technology; Messages exchanged by device 301, data and/or configuration related to electronic device 100 and nearby devices.
  • the processor may be configured to determine the responding target device according to the orientation parameters of the multiple nearby devices when acquiring the orientation parameters of the multiple nearby devices in the local area network.
  • Transceivers can be used to communicate with electronic devices connected to a local area network. It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, multiple nearby areas may be connected to the same local area network, or may not be connected to the same local area network, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the structure shown in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the communication system 300 .
  • the communication system 300 may include more or less devices than shown.
  • FIG. 3A shows a schematic structural diagram of an exemplary electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charge management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and so on.
  • SIM Subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structures illustrated in the embodiments of the present application do not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or less components than shown, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processor
  • graphics processor graphics processor
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 .
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • the NPU can perform artificial intelligence operations using Convolutional Neural Networks (CNN) processing. For example, using the CNN model to do a lot of information identification and information screening can realize the training and identification of situational intelligence.
  • CNN Convolutional Neural Networks
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous transmitter) receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transceiver
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus that includes a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
  • the processor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flash, the camera 193 and the like through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate with each other through the I2C bus interface, so as to realize the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the processor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus may be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 110 with the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through a CSI interface, so as to realize the photographing function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the GPIO interface can be configured by software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface may be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and the like.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that conforms to the USB standard specification, and may specifically be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through the headphones.
  • the interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiments of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 and supplies power to the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modulation and demodulation processor, the baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • the antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of the wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G etc. applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and then turn it into an electromagnetic wave for radiation through the antenna 1 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110.
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and passed to the application processor.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through the display screen 194 .
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110, and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including UWB, wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (WiFi) networks), bluetooth (BT), global navigation satellites Wireless communication solutions such as global navigation satellite system (GNSS), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), and infrared technology (IR).
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT Bluetooth
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication
  • IR infrared technology
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , perform frequency modulation on it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 2 .
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), Time Division Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), a global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), a Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • UWB wireless communication is a wireless personal area network communication technology with low power consumption and high-speed transmission.
  • UWB uses pulsed signals to transmit data.
  • UWB utilizes nanosecond (ns) to picosecond (ps) level non-sinusoidal narrow pulse signals to transmit data, and time modulation technology enables its transmission rate to be greatly improved. Because very short pulses are used, the transmit power of UWB devices is very small at the same time of high-speed communication, only a few percent of the current continuous carrier system, so the power consumption is relatively low.
  • UWB Compared with the traditional narrowband system, UWB system has the advantages of strong penetration, low power consumption, good anti-multipath effect, high security, low system complexity, and can provide precise positioning accuracy.
  • UWB can be applied to wireless communication applications that require high-quality services, and can be used in wireless personal area networks (WPANs), home network connections, and short-range radars.
  • WPANs wireless personal area networks
  • UWB will become a technical means to solve the contradiction between the demand for high-speed Internet access in enterprises, homes, public places, etc. and the increasingly crowded frequency resource allocation.
  • the electronic device 100 can measure distance and RRSI through a UWB antenna.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement AOA measurement through at least two UWB antennas. The following describes the arrangement and distribution of the UWB antennas exemplarily provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the coordinate system of the electronic device can be defined in the following manner: the X axis is parallel to the short side direction of the screen of the electronic device, pointing from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen; the Y axis is parallel to the long side direction of the screen, from The bottom of the screen points to the top of the screen; the Z axis is perpendicular to the plane formed by the X axis and the Y axis, that is, the Z axis is perpendicular to the plane where the screen is located.
  • the Z axis is opposite to the direction of gravity.
  • top, bottom, left, and right mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are relative, and are exemplary descriptions in specific implementations, and should not be construed to limit the embodiments of the present application. It can be understood that when the posture of the electronic device changes, the top, bottom, left and right sides of the electronic device mentioned in the embodiments of the present application will not change.
  • 3C-3E exemplarily illustrate the electronic device 100 having a UWB antenna.
  • the electronic terminal 100 has 2 UWB antennas, namely antenna A and antenna B.
  • the connecting line of the antenna A and the antenna B is parallel to the X-axis of the electronic device, and the two UWB antennas are arranged in one dimension.
  • the electronic terminal 100 has three antennas, namely, antenna A, antenna B, and antenna C. Among them, the connecting lines of antenna B and antenna C are parallel to the Y-axis of the electronic device, and the three UWB antennas are arranged in two dimensions.
  • the electronic device has 4 UWB antennas, namely Antenna A, Antenna B, Antenna C and Antenna d.
  • the connecting line of the antenna C and the antenna B is parallel to the Z-axis of the electronic device, and the four UWB antennas are arranged in three dimensions.
  • the distance between the antenna A and the antenna V is d1
  • the distance between the antenna A and the antenna C is d2
  • the distance between the antenna A and the antenna B is d3.
  • d1, d2 and d3 are all less than ⁇ /2
  • ⁇ is the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave.
  • the arrangement of the UWB antennas and the distribution positions on the electronic device shown in FIG. 3C to FIG. 3E are only examples and are not intended to limit the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may also have a larger number of UWB antennas; in the same arrangement, in addition to the number of UWB antennas shown in FIGS. 3C to 3E , Distribution location, there may also be other distribution locations.
  • the UWB antenna and the aforementioned antenna 1 and antenna 2 may be multiplexed, or may be independent of each other. There is no specific limitation here.
  • the UWB communication module of the electronic device 100 may be in a power-on state.
  • the electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • Display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like.
  • Display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light).
  • LED diode AMOLED
  • flexible light-emitting diode flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED) and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may include one or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than one.
  • the display screen 194 displays the interface content currently output by the system.
  • the interface content is an interface provided by an instant messaging application.
  • the electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193, the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193 .
  • the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera photosensitive element through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera photosensitive element transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin tone.
  • ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be provided in the camera 193 .
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object is projected through the lens to generate an optical image onto the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats of image signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • a digital signal processor is used to process digital signals, in addition to processing digital image signals, it can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy and so on.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs.
  • the electronic device 100 can play or record videos of various encoding formats, such as: Moving Picture Experts Group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
  • MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group
  • MPEG2 moving picture experts group
  • MPEG3 MPEG4
  • MPEG4 Moving Picture Experts Group
  • the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 .
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card.
  • Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 121 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like.
  • the storage data area may store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100 and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 may implement audio functions through an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, an earphone interface 170D, an application processor, and the like. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used for converting digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also for converting analog audio input into digital audio signal. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also referred to as a "speaker" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
  • the receiver 170B also referred to as "earpiece" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the voice can be answered by placing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to collect sound (eg, ambient sound, including sounds made by people, sounds made by equipment, etc.), and convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • sound eg, ambient sound, including sounds made by people, sounds made by equipment, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C.
  • the microphone 163 can collect ambient sound in real time and obtain audio data. The situation in which the microphone 163 collects sound is related to the environment in which it is located.
  • the sound collected by the microphone 163 includes the surrounding environment noise and the sound of the user uttering the wake-up word.
  • the sound collected by the microphone 163 is the sound of the user issuing the wake-up word.
  • the voice wake-up function of the electronic device is enabled, but the user does not speak a wake-up word to wake up the electronic device, and the sound collected by the microphone 163 is only ambient noise.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which can implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may further be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions.
  • the earphone jack 170D is used to connect wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D can be the USB interface 130, or can be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals, and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals.
  • the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194 .
  • the pressure sensor 180A can be used to capture the pressure value generated when the user's finger part touches the display screen, and transmit the pressure value to the processor, so that the processor can identify which finger part the user inputs through User action.
  • the capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates of conductive material.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance.
  • a touch operation acts on the display screen 194
  • the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions.
  • the pressure sensor 180A can transmit the detected capacitance value to the processor, so that the processor can identify which finger part (knuckle or finger pad, etc.) the user uses to input the user operation.
  • the pressure sensor 180A may also calculate the number of touch points according to the detected signal, and transmit the calculated value to the processor, so that the processor recognizes that the user inputs the user through a single finger or multiple fingers operate.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion attitude of the electronic device 100 .
  • the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 about three axes may be determined by the gyro sensor 180B.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the shaking angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shaking of the electronic device 100 through reverse motion to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenarios.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist in positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip holster using the magnetic sensor 180D.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Further, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, characteristics such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). The magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 100 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc. In some optional embodiments of the present application, the acceleration sensor 180E may be used to capture the acceleration value generated when the user's finger touches the display screen (or the user's finger taps the rear side frame of the rear shell of the electronic device 100 ), and converts the acceleration value It is transmitted to the processor, so that the processor can identify the part of the user's finger through which the user's operation is input.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the attitude change of the electronic device 100 by using the gyro sensor and/or the acceleration sensor, and then recognize the user operation.
  • the current user operation is identified as a pointing operation according to the posture change of the electronic device 100, and the pointing operation may be that the user points the electronic device 100 in a specific direction and keeps pointing in the specific direction for a preset time.
  • the electronic device 100 can measure the distance through infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 can use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
  • the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the display screen to save power.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in a pocket, so as to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, accessing application locks, taking pictures with fingerprints, answering incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect the temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the electronic device 100 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 caused by the low temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also called “touch panel”.
  • the touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194 , and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation acting on or near it, and the touch touch operation refers to an operation of a user's hand, elbow, stylus, etc. touching the display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • Visual output related to touch operations may be provided through display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the location where the display screen 194 is located.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the pulse of the human body and receive the blood pressure beating signal.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be disposed in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibration bone block obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the function of heart rate detection.
  • the keys 190 include a power-on key, a volume key, and the like. Keys 190 may be mechanical keys. It can also be a touch key.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • Motor 191 can generate vibrating cues.
  • the motor 191 can be used for vibrating alerts for incoming calls, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations acting on different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations on different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging state, the change of the power, and can also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be contacted and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the following takes the electronic device 201 as an example to introduce the structure of a smart home device provided in this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 201 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 201 may include: a processor 401 , a memory 402 , a wireless communication processing module 403 , an antenna 404 , a power switch 405 , a wired LAN communication processing module 406 , a USB communication processing module 407 , and an audio module 408 . in:
  • the processor 401 may be used to read and execute computer readable instructions.
  • the processor 401 may mainly include a controller, an arithmetic unit, and a register.
  • the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends out control signals for the operations corresponding to the instructions.
  • the arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of the instruction.
  • the hardware architecture of the processor 401 may be an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) architecture, a MIPS architecture, an ARM architecture, an NP architecture, or the like.
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • processor 401 may be configured to parse signals received by wireless communication module 403 and/or wired LAN communication processing module 406, such as probe requests broadcast by terminal 100, and the like. Processing 401 may be used to perform corresponding processing operations according to the parsing result, such as generating a probe response, and so on.
  • the processor 401 may also be configured to generate signals sent out by the wireless communication module 403 and/or the wired LAN communication processing module 406, such as Bluetooth broadcast signals and beacon signals.
  • Memory 402 is coupled to processor 401 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • memory 402 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the memory 402 can store an operating system, such as an embedded operating system such as uCOS, VxWorks, RTLinux, and the like.
  • the memory 402 may also store communication programs that may be used by the terminal 100, one or more servers, or accessory devices to communicate.
  • the wireless communication module 403 may include one or more of a UWB communication module 403A, a Bluetooth communication module 403B, a WLAN communication module 403C, and an infrared communication module 403D.
  • the UWB communication module 403A can be integrated into a chip (System on Chip, SOC), and the UWB communication module 403A can also be integrated with other communication modules (eg, Bluetooth communication module 403B) in hardware (or software).
  • one or more of the UWB communication module 403A, the Bluetooth communication module 403B, the WLAN communication module 403C, and the infrared communication module 403D can listen to signals emitted by other devices (eg, the electronic device 100 ), such as measurement signals , scan signals, etc., and can send response signals, such as measurement responses, scan responses, etc., so that other devices (such as electronic device 100) can discover electronic device 201 and communicate with one or more of UWB, Bluetooth, WLAN, or infrared A short-range wireless communication technology establishes a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the electronic device 100 ) for data transmission.
  • one or more of the UWB communication module 403A, the Bluetooth communication module 403B, the WLAN communication module 403C, and the infrared communication module 403D can also transmit signals, such as broadcasting UWB measurement signals, beacon signals, so that other A device (such as the electronic device 100 ) can discover the electronic device 201 and establish a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the electronic device 100 ) through one or more short-range wireless communication technologies in UWB, Bluetooth, WLAN, or infrared. data transmission.
  • signals such as broadcasting UWB measurement signals, beacon signals
  • the wireless communication module 403 may also include a cellular mobile communication module (not shown).
  • the cellular mobile communication processing module can communicate with other devices (such as servers) through cellular mobile communication technology.
  • Antenna 404 may be used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • the antennas of different communication modules can be multiplexed or independent of each other to improve the utilization rate of the antennas.
  • the antenna of the Bluetooth communication module 403A can be multiplexed as the antenna of the WLAN communication module 403B.
  • the UWB communication module 403A is to use a separate UWB antenna.
  • the electronic device 201 in order to realize UWB communication, has at least one UWB antenna.
  • the power switch 405 may be used to control the power supply from the power source to the electronic device 201 .
  • the wired LAN communication processing module 406 can be used to communicate with other devices in the same LAN through the wired LAN, and can also be used to connect to the WAN through the wired LAN, and can communicate with the devices in the WAN.
  • the USB communication processing module 407 may be used to communicate with other devices through a USB interface (not shown).
  • the audio module 408 can be used to output audio signals through the audio output interface, so that the electronic device 201 can support audio playback.
  • the audio module can also be used to receive audio data through the audio input interface.
  • the electronic device 201 may be a media playing device such as a television set and a speaker, or may be a non-media playing device such as an air conditioner and a refrigerator.
  • the audio module 408 can collect ambient sound in real time to obtain audio data.
  • the audio module can also perform speech recognition on the audio data received by the audio module.
  • the electronic device 201 shown in FIG. 4 is only an example, and the electronic device 201 may have more or fewer components than those shown in FIG. 4 , two or more components may be combined, or Available in different parts configurations.
  • the various components shown in the figures may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
  • the following combined voice interaction scenario specifically introduces a device control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the devices involved in the flowchart of the method include electronic device 100 , electronic device 201 , electronic device 202 , and electronic device 203 . In this embodiment of the present application, it is not limited to the electronic device 100, the electronic device 201, the electronic device 202, and the electronic device 203.
  • the devices involved in the flow chart of the method may include more or less devices, which are only exemplary in FIG. 5A. This application is to be interpreted and should not be construed as a limitation.
  • FIG. 5A shows a device control method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 201 detects a user's voice command (eg, a preset wake-up word)
  • a UWB measurement request is initiated; the electronic device 100 determines the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 according to the UWB measurement request.
  • the above device control method includes but is not limited to steps S101 to S107, wherein:
  • the electronic device 201 collects ambient sound in real time.
  • the user points the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 201 and speaks a voice command. For example, when the user wants to wake up the electronic device 201, the user points the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 201 and says "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi", that is, the above voice command includes the preset wake-up word "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi”. For example, when the user wants to control the electronic device 201 to play music, the user points the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 201 and says "play music”.
  • the three-dimensional coordinate system of the electronic device 100 is shown in FIG. 3B .
  • the user pointing the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 201 refers to pointing the Y-axis of the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 201 may collect voice information in real time or periodically when the voice wake-up function is turned on.
  • the electronic device 201 detects a voice command according to the above-mentioned ambient sound.
  • the electronic device 201 collects the voice made by the user through the audio module, for example, the specific content of the voice is "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi”.
  • the electronic device 201 compares the specific content of the collected voice "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi" with the voice keyword "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi" of the pre-stored wake-up word, if the specific content of the voice is consistent with the voice keyword of the pre-stored wake-up word, Then it is determined that the voice made by the user is the wake-up word "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi".
  • the electronic device 201 detects the voice command issued by the user according to the aforementioned ambient sound.
  • the electronic device 201 collects the voice made by the user through the audio module 408, for example, the specific content of the voice is "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi".
  • the electronic device 201 compares the specific content of the collected voice "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi” with the voice keyword "Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi" of the pre-stored wake-up word, and compares the voice features of the collected voice with the preset user's voice.
  • Feature comparison if the specific content of the voice is consistent with the voice keywords of the pre-stored wake-up word, and the matching degree between the voice features of the collected voice and the preset user's voice features exceeds a certain threshold, it is determined that the preset user issued a wake-up word" Xiaoyi, Xiaoyi".
  • the electronic device 201 broadcasts a UWB measurement request, and the electronic device 100 receives the UWB measurement request, where the UWB measurement request carries the identity document (ID) ID1 of the electronic device 201 .
  • ID identity document
  • the electronic device 201 After the electronic device 201 detects the user's voice command, in order to determine the target device to be controlled by the voice command, the electronic device 201 initiates the measurement of the azimuth parameter.
  • the above-mentioned orientation parameters may include the distance between the electronic device 201 and the electronic device 100 , the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 on the electronic device 100 , and may also include RRSI.
  • the RRSI may be used to determine whether there is obstruction between the electronic device 201 and the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 201 broadcasts the first measurement request, and records the sending time of the first measurement request as T1, the first measurement request carries ID1, and the first measurement request is used to measure the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the first measurement request sent by the electronic device 201 at time T2, and records the reception time of the first measurement request as T2.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 according to the UWB measurement request.
  • the UWB measurement request carries the transmission time of the UWB measurement request
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the distance of the electronic device 201 according to the UWB measurement request according to the transmission time and the reception time of the UWB measurement request. Determine the UWB measurement request signal AOA and RRSI.
  • the electronic device 100 determines that the target device is the electronic device 201 according to the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 , and the electronic device 203 .
  • the azimuth parameters include distance, signal AOA, and RRSI
  • the electronic device 100 determines, according to the azimuth parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 , among the devices that are not blocked by the electronic device 100 , the AOA is the closest to the preset. Let the device with the closest angle or distance be the electronic device 201 .
  • the azimuth parameters include distance and signal AOA
  • the electronic device 100 determines, according to the azimuth parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 , that the device whose AOA is closest to the preset angle or distance is the electronic device 201 .
  • the azimuth parameter includes a signal AOA
  • the electronic device 100 determines, according to the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 , that the device whose AOA is closest to the preset angle is the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 100 sends the first indication information to the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 201 In response to the first instruction information and the above-mentioned voice command, the electronic device 201 sends response information.
  • the above-mentioned response information can be presented in one or more forms of voice, text, image, animation and the like.
  • the electronic device 201 is a display device (eg, a television) including a display screen, and the above-mentioned response information can be presented as a text message "I'm here".
  • the electronic device 201 is an audio device including a speaker (eg, a speaker), and the above-mentioned response information can be presented as a voice message "I'm here". Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 1A , the speaker emits a voice "I am".
  • step S104 may specifically include S104A to S104D, wherein:
  • the electronic device 100 sends a first measurement response to the electronic device 201 at time T3, where the first measurement response carries ID1 and the identification ID2 of the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 sends the first measurement response to the electronic device 201 at time T3, and records the sending time of the first measurement response as T3.
  • the electronic device 201 receives the first measurement response at time T4, and records the reception time of the first measurement request as T4.
  • the first measurement response carries ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 100 sends a second measurement request to the electronic device 201 at time T5, and the second measurement request carries ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 100 sends the second measurement request to the electronic device 201 at time T5, and records the sending time of the second measurement request as T5.
  • the electronic device 201 receives the second measurement request at time T6, and records the reception time of the second measurement request as T6.
  • the second measurement request carries ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 sends a second measurement response to the electronic device 100 at time T7, and the second measurement request carries T1, T4, T6, T7, ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 sends the second measurement response to the electronic device 100 at time T7, and records the sending time of the second measurement response as T7.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the second measurement request at T8, and records the reception time of the second measurement request as T8.
  • the second measurement request carries T1, T4, T6, T7, ID1 and ID2.
  • S104D Determine the distance of the electronic device 201 according to T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7 and T8, and determine the signal AOA and RRSI of the electronic device 201 according to the first measurement request and/or the second measurement response.
  • step S104D may include:
  • the electronic device 100 determines the distance of the electronic device 201 according to T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7 and T8.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the average one-way flight time T between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 according to T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7 and T8. Then, according to the product of the one-way flight time T and the electromagnetic wave propagation speed C, the distance D from the electronic device 201 can be determined as C*T.
  • the time difference between the transmission time T1 of the first measurement request and the reception time T4 of the first measurement response is equal to Tround1
  • the time difference between the reception time T2 of the first measurement request and the transmission time T3 of the first measurement response is equal to Trelay1
  • the second time difference is equal to Trelay1.
  • the time difference between the transmission time T5 of the measurement request and the reception time T8 of the second measurement response is equal to Tround2
  • the time difference between the reception time T6 of the second measurement request and the transmission time T7 of the second measurement response is equal to Trelay2.
  • the one-way flight time T may be expressed as follows:
  • the electronic device 100 determines the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 according to the first measurement request and/or the second measurement response.
  • the electronic device 100 may calculate the receiving direction of the signal according to the phase difference between the first measurement request signal and/or the second measurement response reaching the UWB antennas at different positions, so as to determine the relative distance between the electronic device 201 and the electronic device 100. towards.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the wireless signal sent by the electronic device 201, and the signal AOA of the signal in the electronic device 100 (that is, relative to the connection line between the receiving antenna 1 and the receiving antenna 2, the above wireless signal
  • the incident angle ⁇ can be determined according to the phase difference of the signal on the receiving antenna 1 and the receiving antenna 2 of the electronic device 100 Sure. in, can be expressed as follows,
  • ⁇ is the wavelength
  • ⁇ ( ⁇ ) is the phase difference of the antenna hardware.
  • the incident angle ⁇ , that is, the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 can be determined by the above formula.
  • the user pointing the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 201 refers to pointing the Y-axis of the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 100 determines the signal AOA sent by the electronic device 201 and received by the electronic device 100 according to the phase difference of the received signals of at least two of the antennas A, B, and C.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the AOA of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 according to the phase difference between the antenna A and the antenna C (ie, the angle of incidence with respect to the Y-axis).
  • the line connecting Antenna A and Antenna C is parallel to the Y axis.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the AOA (ie the incident angle relative to the X-axis) of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 according to the phase difference between the antenna A and the antenna B.
  • the line connecting Antenna A and Antenna B is parallel to the X-axis.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the AOA (ie, the incident angle relative to the Z axis) of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 according to the phase difference between the antenna B and the antenna C.
  • the line connecting antenna B and antenna C is parallel to the Z axis. In this implementation manner, the closer the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 is to 90 degrees, the closer the electronic device 100 is to the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 according to the first measurement request in step S104A, or can determine the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 according to the second measurement response in step S104C, or can also determine the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 according to the first measurement in step S104C
  • the average value of the signal AOA corresponding to the request and the second measurement response determines the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 100 determines the RRSI for transmitting the signal with the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 100 determines the RRSI of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 according to the average RRSI of the first measurement request and the second measurement response. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 determines the RRSI of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 according to the RRSI of the first measurement request or the second measurement response.
  • the electronic device 100 can also determine the RRSI of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 according to the RRSI of the first measurement request in step S104A,
  • whether there is an obstruction between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 may be determined according to the RRSI of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 .
  • NLOS non-line-of-sight
  • LOS line-of-sight
  • the preset RRSI of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 received by the electronic device 100 may be determined.
  • the RRSI of the received signal sent by the electronic device 201 is smaller than the preset RRSI, it is determined that there is an obstruction between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 , otherwise there is no obstruction.
  • the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 may include the distance of the electronic device 201, the signal AOA, and the first identifier.
  • the first identifier of the electronic device 201 is used to represent whether there is a blockage between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 . For example, the first flag equal to 1 indicates that there is occlusion, and the first flag equal to 0 indicates that there is no occlusion.
  • step S104 may further specifically include S104E to S104G.
  • the distance of the electronic device 201 is determined according to T1, T2, T3, T4, T9 and T10, which specifically includes: the electronic device 100 determines the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device according to T1, T2, T3, T4, T9 and T10. Average one-way flight time T between devices 201 . Then, according to the product of the one-way flight time T and the electromagnetic wave propagation speed C, the distance D from the electronic device 201 can be determined as C*T.
  • the time difference between the sending time T1 of the first measurement request and the receiving time T4 of the first measurement response is equal to Tround1
  • the time difference between the receiving time T2 of the first measurement request and the sending time T3 of the first measurement response is equal to Trelay1
  • the first time difference is Trelay1.
  • the time difference between the transmission time T3 of the measurement response and the reception time T10 of the third measurement response is equal to Tround2
  • the time difference between the reception time T6 of the first measurement response and the transmission time T9 of the third measurement response is equal to Trelay2
  • the one-way flight time T can be as formula 1 shown.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the target device as the electronic device 201 according to one or more of the distances between the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 , the signal AOA, and the RRSI.
  • step S105 the electronic device 100 determines the target device as the electronic device 201 according to the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201, the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203, which may specifically include:
  • step S1 determines whether there is a device that does not block the electronic device 100, if so, go to step S2, otherwise go to step S4 .
  • the preset RRSI of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 received by the electronic device 100 may be determined.
  • the RRSI of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 is less than the preset RRSI, it is determined that there is a blockage between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 , otherwise there is no blockage.
  • the electronic device 201 when the first identifier of the electronic device 201 is equal to the first value (eg 1), there is no obstruction between the electronic device 201 and the electronic device 100; when the first identifier of the electronic device 201 is equal to the second value (eg 0) ), the electronic device 201 and the electronic device 100 are blocked.
  • the first value eg 1
  • the second value eg 0
  • step S2 Whether the number of unobstructed devices in the electronic device 201, the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 is equal to 1, if so, go to step S3, if not, go to step S4.
  • the unobstructed device is determined to be the target device that the user intends to wake up.
  • step S1 it is determined in step S1 that there is no device that is not blocked from the electronic device 100 in the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 , then the electronic device 100 in S4 determines the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 The two electronics with the mid-signal AOA closest to the preset angle.
  • step S2 determines that the number of electronic devices 201 , 202 and 203 that are not blocked from the electronic device 100 is greater than 1, then in S4 the electronic device 100 determines the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device. Among the unobstructed devices in 203, the two electronic devices whose signal AOA is closest to the preset angle.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 according to the phase difference between the antenna A and the antenna C, and the line connecting the antenna A and the antenna C is parallel to the Y axis. In this implementation manner, the above-mentioned preset angle is equal to 0 degrees. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 determines the signal AOA sent by the electronic device 201 according to the phase difference between the antenna A and the antenna B, and the line connecting the antenna A and the antenna B is parallel to the X axis. In this implementation manner, the above-mentioned preset angle is equal to 90 degrees.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the signal AOA sent by the electronic device 201 according to the phase difference between the antenna B and the antenna C, and the connection line between the antenna B and the antenna C is parallel to the Z axis.
  • the above-mentioned preset angle is equal to 90 degrees.
  • the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 is determined in different manners, and the above-mentioned preset angles may be different.
  • the above-mentioned preset angle may also be other values, which are not specifically limited here.
  • step S5 Whether the difference between the signal AOAs of the above two electronic devices is greater than the first threshold, if so, go to step S6, if not, go to step S7.
  • the first threshold is 10 degrees.
  • the electronic device 100 determines that among the unobstructed devices (or all devices), the electronic device closest to the pointing direction of the electronic device 100 and the closest is the device that the user intends to wake up.
  • the direction parameters include distance and signal AOA.
  • Step S105 may specifically include only S4 to S7. That is, the electronic device 100 determines, according to the azimuth parameters of the nearby devices, that the device that is closest to the preset angle or the closest distance among the nearby devices is the electronic device 201 .
  • the user may use one or more electronic devices (eg, smart phone, smart bracelet, tablet) to control nearby smart home devices.
  • the smart home device detects the user's voice command (such as a preset wake-up word), it broadcasts a UWB measurement request, and the user's electronic device (such as the electronic device 100 and The electronic device 500 ) will send a measurement response to the electronic device 201 , and then the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 relative to the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 500 may be determined respectively.
  • the smart home device detects the user's voice command (such as a preset wake-up word)
  • the user's electronic device such as the electronic device 100 and The electronic device 500
  • the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 relative to the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 500 may be determined respectively.
  • FIG. 5H another method for determining a target device according to orientation parameters of multiple electronic devices is provided, and reference may be made to FIG. 5H for the specific implementation.
  • S8 may also be included after step S2.
  • step S8 Whether the difference between the signal AOA of the unobstructed nearby device and the preset angle is smaller than the preset difference, if so, go to step S3, if not, go to S9.
  • the preset difference is 20 degrees.
  • S10 may also be included after step S4.
  • the proposed method can reduce the possibility of misjudgment of the target device when there are multiple user electronic devices (eg, electronic device 100 and electronic device 500 ) that can control the smart home device.
  • FIG. 6A shows another device control method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the devices involved in the flowchart of the method include electronic device 100 , electronic device 201 , electronic device 202 , and electronic device 203 .
  • a user's voice command eg, a preset wake-up word
  • a UWB measurement request is initiated; and the electronic device 201 can determine the distance from the electronic device 100 according to the measurement response fed back by the electronic device 100 .
  • the above device control method includes but is not limited to steps S201 to S209, wherein:
  • the electronic device 201 collects ambient sound in real time.
  • the electronic device 201 detects a voice command according to the above-mentioned ambient sound.
  • step S102 Specifically, reference may be made to related embodiments of step S102. It will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 201 broadcasts a UWB measurement request, and the electronic device 100 receives the UWB measurement request.
  • the electronic device 201 broadcasts a first measurement request at time T1, the first measurement request carries ID1, and the first measurement request is used to measure the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201.
  • the electronic device 201 records the sending time of the first measurement request as T1.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the first measurement request sent by the electronic device 201 at time T2, and records the reception time of the first measurement request as T2.
  • the electronic device 100 sends a measurement response to the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 201 determines an orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 according to the measurement response sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 201 sends the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 to the electronic device 301 .
  • the electronic device 301 determines that the target device is the electronic device 201 according to the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 , and the electronic device 203 .
  • how the electronic device 301 determines the target device according to the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 can refer to the related embodiments in FIGS. 5G and 5H . It will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 301 sends the first indication information to the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 201 In response to the first instruction information and the above-mentioned voice instruction, the electronic device 201 sends response information.
  • step S204 may further include step S204A and step S204B.
  • the electronic device 100 determines that the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 is AOA1 according to the phase difference of the first measurement request on different antennas.
  • how the electronic device 100 determines the AOA1 may refer to the relevant embodiments of step S104D, which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 100 sends a first measurement response to the electronic device 201 at time T3, where the first measurement request carries AOA1, T2, T3, ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 receives the first measurement response sent by the electronic device 100 at time T4, and records the reception time of the first measurement response as T4.
  • the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 is determined by the electronic device 100 .
  • the smart furniture device can distinguish the position and direction of the electronic device 100 according to the signal sent by the electronic device 100 , but cannot distinguish the pointing direction of the electronic device 100 .
  • Step S205 specifically includes: for the electronic device 100, the electronic device 201 determines that the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 is AOA1, the electronic device 201 determines the distance of the electronic device 201 according to T1, T2, T3 and T4, and the electronic device 201 determines the first measurement response. RRSI.
  • step S104D how the electronic device 201 determines whether the electronic device 201 is blocked according to the RRSI of the first measurement response can refer to step S104D, which will not be repeated here.
  • the time difference between the sending time T1 of the first measurement request and the receiving time T4 of the first measurement response is equal to Tround1
  • the time difference between the receiving time T2 of the first measurement request and the sending time T3 of the first measurement response is equal to Trelay1, one-way.
  • the flight time T can be expressed as follows:
  • the electronic device 201 may initiate a measurement request multiple times, and use the ranging algorithm 4 shown in FIG. 6D to obtain a one-way measurement according to the sending and receiving time of the multiple measurement requests and the multiple measurement measurement responses. Time-of-flight average to reduce distance measurement errors.
  • the following introduces another device control method provided in this application in combination with a voice interaction scenario.
  • the devices involved in the flowchart of the method include electronic device 100 , electronic device 201 , electronic device 202 , and electronic device 203 .
  • the above-mentioned device control method includes but is not limited to steps S211 to S216, wherein:
  • the electronic device 201 collects ambient sound in real time.
  • the electronic device 201 detects a voice command according to the above-mentioned ambient sound, it determines the decibel information of the above-mentioned voice command.
  • the electronic device 201 sends the decibel information determined by the electronic device 201 to the electronic device 301 .
  • the electronic device 301 may be the electronic device 100, or one of the nearby devices (eg, the electronic device 202), or may be a third-party device such as a router and a gateway. There is no specific limitation here.
  • the electronic device 301 determines, according to the decibel information of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 , the electronic device 201 with the largest decibel information as the target device.
  • the electronic device 301 sends the first indication information to the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 201 In response to the first instruction information and the above-mentioned voice command, the electronic device 201 sends response information.
  • the energy information of the voice command is determined, and the energy information is sent to the electronic device 301 .
  • the electronic device 301 can also determine the electronic device with the largest energy information as the target device the user intends to wake up according to the energy information of the received voice commands of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 and the electronic device 203 .
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide another device control method, and the proposed method can realize the pairing connection between the electronic device 100 and the target device through simple operations.
  • FIG. 7A there are multiple smart home devices near the user, such as speakers 201 , refrigerators 202 , televisions 203 , air conditioners 204 , and the like.
  • the user points the electronic device 100 to the target device (for example, the speaker 201 ), and the electronic device 100 responds to the detected first user operation ( For example, the user clicks the back cover of the electronic device 100 ), and the electronic device 100 initiates the measurement of orientation parameters (eg, distance, signal AOA, RRSI, etc.) for the above-mentioned multiple smart home devices.
  • orientation parameters eg, distance, signal AOA, RRSI, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can obtain the connection parameters of the speaker 201 and establish a connection with the speaker 201 according to the above connection parameters.
  • the electronic device 100 can be a Huawei mobile phone. After the electronic device 100 and the speaker 201 are successfully connected, the speaker 201 can send out a voice message “establish a connection with the Huawei mobile phone”.
  • the electronic device 100 may also display prompt information 501 , which is used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 has established a connection with the speaker 201 .
  • the specific content of the prompt information 501 may be "establish a connection with a speaker”.
  • the user interface 10 exemplarily shown in FIG. 7B may be a home screen.
  • User interface 10 may include a status bar, a navigation bar, a calendar indicator, a weather indicator.
  • Multiple application icons may also be included, such as an icon for mutual transfer, an icon for a gallery, an icon for music, an icon for a smart home, and so on.
  • the user can control the sound box 201 through the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an input operation (eg, a single-click operation) acting on the prompt information 501 by the user, and in response to the detected input operation, the electronic device 100 displays the control interface of the speaker 201 . 11.
  • the user interface 11 may include: an application title bar 601 , a connection card 602 , a music card 603 , and a nearby device card 604 . in:
  • the connection card 602 may include instruction information 602A and connection method 602B.
  • the indication information 602A is used to indicate whether the speaker 201 is currently in an online state or an offline state.
  • the online state means that the speaker 201 is currently connected to the Internet
  • the offline state means that the speaker 201 is not currently connected to the Internet.
  • the connection method 602B is used to indicate the current connection method between the speaker 201 and the electronic device 100.
  • the connection method 602B can be displayed on the icon of Bluetooth.
  • the connection method 602B can be displayed on the icon of WiFi.
  • Music card 603 may include music title 603A, pause control 603B, previous control 603C, next control 603D, progress bar 603E, volume 603F, more control 603H.
  • the pause control 603B can receive a user's input operation (eg, a click operation), and in response to the detected user operation, the speaker 201 pauses playing music.
  • a user's input operation eg, a click operation
  • the previous control 603C may receive a user's input operation (eg, a single-click operation), and in response to the detected user operation, the speaker 201 may play the previous song of the currently playing song in the music list.
  • a user's input operation eg, a single-click operation
  • the next control 603D may receive a user's input operation (eg, a single-click operation), and in response to the detected user operation, the speaker 201 may play the next song of the currently playing song in the music list.
  • a user's input operation eg, a single-click operation
  • the progress bar 603E may indicate the total duration (eg, 04:42) and the played duration (eg, 00:42) of the current song.
  • the volume 603F can receive a user's input operation (eg, a sliding operation), and in response to the detected user operation, the speaker 201 adjusts the playback volume of the speaker 201 .
  • a user's input operation eg, a sliding operation
  • the more controls 603H may receive a user's input operation (eg, a swipe operation), and in response to the detected user operation, the electronic device 100 may display more function options of the music card, such as sharing, deleting, downloading, and the like.
  • a user's input operation eg, a swipe operation
  • the electronic device 100 may display more function options of the music card, such as sharing, deleting, downloading, and the like.
  • the nearby devices card 604 may include icons for one or more nearby devices, such as an air conditioner icon 604A, a living room TV icon 604B, a refrigerator icon 604C.
  • the order in which the icons of the plurality of nearby devices in the nearby device card 604 are arranged may be based on factors such as distance or frequency of use.
  • the nearby device card 604 may receive a user's input operation (eg, a long press operation), and in response to the detected user operation, the electronic device 100 may display icons of more nearby devices.
  • the air conditioner icon 604A, the living room TV icon 604B or the refrigerator icon 604C may receive a user's input operation (eg, a single-click operation), and in response to the detected user operation, the electronic device 100 may display a control interface corresponding to the device.
  • a user's input operation eg, a single-click operation
  • the user interface 10 includes a smart home icon 502 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an input operation (eg, a click operation) of the user acting on the smart home icon 502, and in response to the above input operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 12 of the smart home.
  • an input operation eg, a click operation
  • the user interface 12 may include: an application title bar 701 , a region selection bar 702 , a home device display bar 703 , an add control 704 , and a function bar 705 . in:
  • the area selection bar 702 may include: all controls 702A, living room controls 702B, master bedroom controls 702C. Wherein, any one of the all controls 702A, the living room control 702B and the master bedroom control 702C may receive an input operation (eg, a single-click operation) from the user, and in response to the detected input operation, the electronic device 100 may display a bar on the home device 703 displays the home equipment in the area corresponding to the control.
  • an input operation eg, a single-click operation
  • the home equipment display column 703 displays a plurality of home equipment in the living room, including a speaker 703A, a living room TV 703B, an air conditioner 703C in the living room, a refrigerator 703D, and a table lamp 703E in the living room.
  • Any one of the home devices displayed in the home device display column 703 can receive an input operation (eg, a single-click operation) from the user, and in response to the detected input operation, the electronic device 100 displays a control interface of the home device.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user operation (eg, a single-click operation) acting on the sound box 703A, and in response to the detected input operation, the electronic device 100 displays the sound box control interface 11 .
  • a user operation eg, a single-click operation
  • the add control 704 may receive a user's input operation (eg, a click operation), and in response to the detected input operation, the electronic device 100 displays an interface for adding a home device.
  • a user's input operation eg, a click operation
  • the function bar 705 may include a smart home icon 705A, a mall icon 705B, a cool play icon 705C, and a user center icon 705D, and receives an input operation (eg, a click operation) from the user, and in response to the detected input operation, the electronic device 100 displays a on the interface corresponding to the icon.
  • an input operation eg, a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 when the user intends to pair and connect the electronic device 100 and the TV set 203, the user points the electronic device 100 to the TV set 203, and the electronic device 100 responds to detecting the user's first user operation (eg, , the user clicks the rear shell of the electronic device 100), the electronic device 100 measures the orientation parameters of the above-mentioned multiple smart home devices, and determines that the target device that the user intends to pair and connect is a TV according to the orientation parameters of the above-mentioned multiple smart home devices 203 : The electronic device 100 acquires the connection parameters of the TV set 203 and establishes a connection with the TV set 203 according to the above connection parameters.
  • the user's first user operation eg, the user clicks the rear shell of the electronic device 100
  • prompt information for example, a text message "establish a connection with a Huawei mobile phone"
  • the TV set 203 can be controlled through the control interface of the TV set 203 displayed by the electronic device 100 .
  • the control interface 13 of the television set 203 is shown in FIG. 7G .
  • the following introduces another device control method provided in this application in combination with a pairing connection scenario.
  • the devices involved in the flowchart of the method include electronic device 100 , electronic device 201 , electronic device 202 , and electronic device 203 .
  • the devices involved in the flow chart of the method may include more or less devices, and FIG. 8A is only an exemplary explanation of the present application, and should not be construed as a limitation.
  • FIG. 8A shows a device control method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the operation of the first user, it initiates a UWB measurement request. And according to the measurement response of the electronic device 201, the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 is determined.
  • the above-mentioned device control method includes but is not limited to steps S301 to S307, wherein:
  • the electronic device 100 detects a first user operation.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the posture change of the electronic device 100 through an acceleration sensor and/or a gyroscope sensor, and determines the pointing operation of the electronic device 100 according to the posture change of the electronic device 100 , and the first user operation is the above-mentioned Point to action.
  • the user points the electronic device 100 to a nearby device (eg, the electronic device 201 ), and performs a first user operation, which is detected by the electronic 100 through an acceleration sensor and/or a gyro sensor.
  • the first user operation may be that the user taps the rear case of the electronic device 100, or the user taps the side frame of the electronic device 100.
  • the user can also implement the first user operation through a voice command.
  • the specific content of the voice command can be “pairing connection”; the user can also implement the first user operation through the buttons of the electronic device 100.
  • the specific content of the voice command can be “pairing connection”; the user can also implement the first user operation through the buttons of the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 broadcasts a UWB measurement request, and the electronic device 201 receives the above-mentioned UWB measurement request.
  • step S302 may specifically include: the electronic device 100 broadcasts the fourth measurement request at time T11, and records the sending time of the fourth measurement request as T11, and the fourth measurement request carries ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 receives the fourth measurement request sent by the electronic device 100 at time T12, and records the reception time of the fourth measurement request as T12.
  • the electronic device 201 sends a measurement response to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 201 sends a fourth measurement response to the electronic device 201 at time T13, and the first measurement request carries T12, T13, ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 receives the fourth measurement response sent by the electronic device 100 at time T4, and records the reception time of the fourth measurement response as time T14.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 according to the measurement response sent by the electronic device 201 .
  • the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 may include one or more of the distance between the electronic device 201 and the electronic device 100 , the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 , and the RRSI of the signal sent by the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 100 determines the one-way flight time of the signal according to T11, T12, T13, T14 and formula (3), and determines the distance of the electronic device 201 according to the one-way flight time; the electronic device 100 determines the signal of the electronic device 201 according to the fourth measurement request AOA and RRSI.
  • step S104G for how the electronic device 100 determines the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201, reference may be made to the relevant embodiments of step S104G. It will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the target device as the electronic device 201 according to the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 , and the electronic device 203 .
  • how the electronic device 100 determines the target device according to the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 , and the electronic device 203 may refer to the related embodiment of FIG. 5G . It will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 100 sends a connection request to the electronic device 201 , and the electronic device 201 receives the connection request sent by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 201 sends first capability information and corresponding connection parameters to the electronic device 100 , where the first capability information is used to represent a communication mode that the electronic device 201 can support.
  • the corresponding connection parameters may include: device ID, pairing key and other parameters.
  • the electronic device 100 can establish a WiFi connection with the electronic device 201 based on the above-mentioned connection parameters using the connection process of the IEEE802.11 standard;
  • the corresponding connection parameters may include parameters such as a secret key, an encryption method, and a Service Set Identifier (SSID).
  • the electronic device 100 may establish a Bluetooth connection with the electronic device 201 based on the above-mentioned connection parameters using the connection process of the IEE802.15.1 standard.
  • the electronic device 100 can preferentially use the connection process of the IEEE802.11 standard to establish a WiFi connection with the electronic device 201 based on the above-mentioned connection parameters.
  • the fourth measurement request may further carry second capability information, where the second capability information is used to represent all communication modes supported by the electronic device 100, such as Bluetooth, WiFi, and the like.
  • the fourth measurement response may also carry the first capability information and corresponding connection parameters.
  • the second capability information includes first capability information, and the second capability information is determined by the electronic device 201 according to the second capability information. In this way, after step S305, the electronic device 100 can directly establish a connection with the electronic device 201 according to the first capability information and the corresponding connection parameters in the fourth measurement response, without sending a connection request again.
  • the electronic device 100 may also initiate measurement requests multiple times, and use ranging algorithm 4 to obtain the average value of one-way flight time according to the sending and receiving times of multiple measurement requests and multiple measurement responses to reduce distance measurement errors.
  • FIG. 8D shows another device control method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the devices involved in the flowchart of the method include electronic device 100 , electronic device 201 , electronic device 202 , and electronic device 203 .
  • a UWB measurement request is initiated; and the electronic device 201 determines the distance to the electronic device 100 according to the UWB measurement request.
  • the above device control method includes but is not limited to steps S401 to S408, wherein:
  • the electronic device 100 detects a first user operation.
  • the electronic device 100 broadcasts a UWB measurement request.
  • step 402 may specifically include: in response to the first user operation, the electronic device 100 broadcasts the fourth measurement request at time T11, and records the sending time of the fourth measurement request as T11, and the fourth measurement request carries ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 receives the fourth measurement request sent by the electronic device 100 at time T12, and records the reception time of the fourth measurement request as T12.
  • the electronic device 201 determines an orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 according to the UWB measurement request.
  • the electronic device 201 sends the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 to the electronic device 301 .
  • how the electronic device 301 determines the target device according to the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 , and the electronic device 203 may refer to the related embodiment in FIG. 5G . It will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 301 sends the second indication information to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 sends a connection request to the electronic device 201.
  • the electronic device 201 sends the first capability information and corresponding connection parameters to the electronic device 100 .
  • step S403 may further include S403A to S403D. in:
  • the electronic device 201 sends a fourth measurement response to the electronic device 100 at time T13, and the fourth measurement response carries ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 sends the fourth measurement response to the electronic device 100 at time T13, and records the sending time of the fourth measurement response as T13, where the fourth measurement response carries ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the fourth measurement response sent by the electronic device 201 at time T14, and records the reception time of the fourth measurement response as T14.
  • the electronic device 100 determines that the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 is AOA3 according to the phase difference of the fourth measurement response on different antennas.
  • how to determine the AOA3 according to the phase difference of the fourth measurement response on different antennas may refer to the relevant embodiments of step S104G, which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 100 sends a fifth measurement response to the electronic device 201, where the fifth measurement response carries AOA3, T11, T14, T15, ID1 and ID2.
  • S403D determine that the signal AOA of the electronic device 201 is AOA3, determine the distance of the electronic device 201 according to T11, T12, T13, T14, T15 and T16, and determine the RRSI of the electronic device 201 according to the fourth measurement request and/or the fifth measurement response.
  • the electronic device determines the one-way flight time of the signal according to T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16 and formula (1), and determines the distance of the electronic device 201 according to the one-way flight time.
  • the fourth measurement request may also carry first capability information, where the first capability information is used to represent one or more communication modes supported by the electronic device 100, such as Bluetooth, WiFi, and the like.
  • the fourth measurement response may also carry second capability information and connection parameters, where the second capability information is used to characterize the communication mode selected by the electronic device 201 and capable of being supported. In this way, after step S406, the electronic device 100 can directly establish a connection with the electronic device 201 according to the connection parameters in the fourth measurement response, without sending a connection request again.
  • the electronic device 100 initiates a UWB measurement request, and the electronic device 201 may also use the ranging algorithm 1 to determine the distance of the electronic device 201 .
  • the ranging algorithm 1 For the ranging algorithm 1, reference may be made to the embodiment in FIG. 5B , which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 9A shows another device control method provided in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the devices involved in the flowchart of the method include electronic device 100 , electronic device 201 , electronic device 202 , and electronic device 203 .
  • the electronic device 201 periodically broadcasts the UWB measurement request; when the electronic device 100 detects the operation of the first user, the electronic device 100 determines the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 according to the UWB measurement request broadcast by the electronic device 201 .
  • the above device control method includes but is not limited to steps S501 to S505, wherein:
  • the electronic device 201 regularly broadcasts the UWB measurement request.
  • the electronic device 100 determines an orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 according to the UWB measurement request.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the orientation parameter of the electronic device 201 according to the sixth measurement request broadcast by the electronic device 201, the sixth measurement request carries ID1 and the sending time T17 of the sixth measurement request .
  • the electronic device 100 receives the fourth measurement request sent by the electronic device 100 at time T18, and records the reception time of the fourth measurement request as T18.
  • the electronic device 100 determines that the target device is the electronic device 201 according to the orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 , and the electronic device 203 .
  • the electronic device 100 sends a connection request to the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 201 sends the first capability information and corresponding connection parameters to the electronic device 100 .
  • step S502 may further include S502A to S502C. in:
  • the first user operation detected by the electronic device 100 sends a sixth measurement response to the electronic device 201 at time T19, and records the sending time of the sixth measurement response as T19, and the sixth measurement response carries ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 receives the sixth measurement response sent by the electronic device 100 at time T20, and records the reception time of the sixth measurement response as T20.
  • the electronic device 100 sends a seventh measurement response to the electronic device 201 at time T21, where the seventh measurement response carries T20, T21, ID1 and ID2.
  • the electronic device 201 receives the seventh measurement response sent by the electronic device 100 at time T22, and records the reception time of the seventh measurement response as T22.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the distance of the electronic device 201 according to T17, T18, T19, T20, T21 and T22, and determines the signals AOA and RRSI of the electronic device 201 according to the sixth measurement request and/or the seventh measurement response.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the one-way flight time of the signal according to T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 and formula (1), and then determines the distance of the electronic device 201 according to the one-way flight time.
  • How to determine the signal AOA and RRSI of the electronic device 201 according to the sixth measurement request and/or the seventh measurement response can refer to the relevant embodiments of step S104G, and details are not repeated here.
  • the sixth measurement request may further carry third capability information, where the third capability information is used to represent one or more communication modes supported by the electronic device 201, such as Bluetooth, WiFi, and the like.
  • the sixth measurement response may further carry fourth capability information, where the fourth capability information is used to represent a communication mode selected and supported by the electronic device 100 according to the third capability information.
  • the seventh measurement response may also carry connection parameters corresponding to the fourth capability information of the electronic device 201 . In this way, after step S503, the electronic device 100 can directly establish a connection with the electronic device 201 according to the connection parameter in the seventh measurement response, without sending a connection request again.
  • the electronic device 201 initiates a UWB measurement request, and the electronic device 100 may also use the ranging algorithm 1 to calculate the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 .
  • the electronic device 201 initiates a UWB measurement request, and the electronic device 201 may also calculate the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 by using the unilateral bidirectional algorithm 1 .
  • the electronic device 201 initiates a UEB measurement request, and the electronic device 201 may also calculate the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 by using the unilateral bidirectional algorithm 2 .
  • the electronic device 201 initiates a UEB measurement request, and the electronic device 201 may also calculate the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 201 by using the unilateral bidirectional algorithm 2 .
  • the unilateral bidirectional algorithm 2 There is no specific limitation here.
  • the software system of the electronic device may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the embodiments of the present application take an Android system with a layered architecture as an example to exemplarily describe the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • FIG. 10A shows a software structural block diagram of an electronic device exemplarily provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device can determine the location parameters (such as distance, signal AOA and RRSI) of nearby devices through UWB positioning technology, and then determine the target device that the user intends to wake up or pair to connect according to the location parameters of multiple nearby devices.
  • the electronic device can establish a wireless communication connection with the target device through one or more wireless communication protocols among UWB, Bluetooth, WLAN and infrared, and perform data transmission.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate with each other through software interfaces.
  • the Android system can be divided into an application layer, an application framework layer, a protocol stack, a hardware abstraction layer (HAL) layer and a kernel layer (kernel) from top to bottom.
  • HAL hardware abstraction layer
  • kernel layer kernel layer
  • the application layer includes a series of application packages such as smart home, bluetooth, WLAN and many more. Apps like camera, gallery, calling, music, video, and more can also be included.
  • the smart home APP is a software program capable of selecting and controlling various smart home devices in the home, and is installed on the electronic device used by the user.
  • the smart home APP may be an application installed on the electronic device when it leaves the factory, or it may be an application downloaded by a user from the network or obtained from other devices during the use of the electronic device.
  • the smart home APP reference may be made to the relevant descriptions of the embodiments in FIG. 7A to FIG. 7G .
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer may mainly include APIs and system services (System Server).
  • the API is used to realize the communication between the application layer and the protocol stack, the HAL layer, and the kernel layer (kernel).
  • kernel layer kernel layer
  • the API may include one or more of UWB API, Bluetooth API, WLAN API, and infrared API.
  • the system service may include one or more of UWB service, Bluetooth service, WLAN service, and infrared service.
  • the electronic device 100 may call corresponding system services by calling one or more of the UWB API, the Bluetooth API, the WLAN API, and the infrared API, so as to detect the orientation parameters of the devices near the electronic device 100. You can also call the corresponding system services by calling one or more of the UWB API, Bluetooth API, WLAN API, and infrared API to establish wireless communication connections with nearby devices and perform data transmission.
  • the UWB service may specifically include one or more services, such as UWB positioning service.
  • the UWB positioning service may include position parameter measurements, wherein the position parameter measurements include one or more of distance measurement, AOA measurement, and RRSI measurement.
  • the electronic device 100 invokes the UWB positioning service through the UWB API to detect location parameters of devices near the electronic device 100.
  • the application framework layer may further add a motion detection component (motion detector), which is used to perform logical judgment on the acquired input event and identify the type of the input event. For example, it is determined that the input event is a knuckle touch event or a finger pad touch event, etc., according to the touch coordinates included in the input event, the time stamp of the touch operation, and other information.
  • the motion detection component can also record the trajectory of the input event, determine the gesture rule of the input event, and respond to different operations according to different gestures.
  • the input event is determined to be a tap event by using information such as the acceleration of the electronic device on three axes (eg, the user's finger taps the rear shell or side frame of the electronic device) included in the input event.
  • the input event is determined to be a pointing event by using information such as the attitude change of the electronic device and the time stamp of the attitude change (for example, the user holds the electronic device to perform a pointing operation) included in the input event.
  • the protocol stack defines multiple applications (profiles) and core protocols (protocols), and each profile defines its own corresponding message format and application rules.
  • profile may be a UWB service (Application), a Bluetooth service, a WLAN service, and so on.
  • the protocol stack may include a UWB protocol stack, a UWB hardware service module, and a UWB time management module.
  • the UWB protocol stack can define the message format of UWB transceiving signals (including receiving and transmitting signals), the data format conversion of UWB transceiving signals, UWB positioning algorithms, etc.
  • the UWB hardware service module can be used to manage the life cycle of UWB firmware and With the software update of UWB firmware, the UWB time management module can be used to record and manage the time stamps of UWB signals sent and received.
  • the protocol stack may further include one or more of a Bluetooth protocol stack, a WLAN protocol stack, and an infrared protocol stack.
  • the UWB positioning service of the application framework layer sends a UWB measurement instruction to the UWB protocol stack, instructing the UWB protocol stack to measure the orientation parameters.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer may include one or more of UWB drivers, Bluetooth drivers, and WLAN drivers, and may also include display drivers, camera drivers, audio drivers, sensor drivers, and so on.
  • the HAL layer and the kernel layer are used to perform corresponding operations in response to the functions called by the system services in the application framework layer. For example, in response to a UWB measurement instruction sent by the UWB positioning service invoking the UWB protocol stack, the UWB chip driver sends a UWB measurement request through a hardware device (eg, a UWB chip).
  • the software structure framework may be on the user's electronic device (eg, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 500 in the above-mentioned embodiment), or may be on the smart home device (such as the electronic device 201 and the electronic device in the above-mentioned embodiment). 202, electronic device 203, electronic device 204, etc.).
  • the UWB positioning initiating device is a smart home device (for example, the electronic device 201).
  • the UWB positioning initiating device may be a user's electronic device (eg, electronic device 201 ), or may be a smart home device (eg, electronic device 201 ).
  • the following takes the pairing connection scenario in the embodiment of FIG. 8A as an example to illustrate the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 as an example.
  • the acceleration sensor detects a knocking operation (for example, knocking on the back cover of the electronic device, or knocking on the side frame of the electronic device), and a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes the tapping operation into the original input event (including the tapping position, the timestamp of the tapping operation, etc.).
  • Raw input events are stored at the kernel layer.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer, and identifies the input event as a paired connection to a smart home device (eg, the electronic device 201 ).
  • the smart home application calls the UWB API of the application framework layer to start the UWB location service.
  • the UWB location service sends UWB measurement commands to the UWB HAL interface in the HAL layer by calling the UWB protocol stack.
  • the UWB HAL interface sends a UWB measurement request to the kernel layer, and the kernel layer drives the UWB chip to broadcast the measurement request (such as the first measurement request) by calling the UWB chip driver according to the above UWB measurement request, and uses the UWB time management module to record the UWB measurement request. timestamp.
  • the electronic device 100 uses the ranging algorithm 3 to measure the distance, the electronic device 100 initiates the UWB positioning measurement, and the electronic device 100 calculates the azimuth parameters.
  • the UWB chip sends a measurement request (such as the first measurement request) through the antenna
  • the UWB chip receives the measurement response (such as the first measurement response) through the antenna
  • the corresponding measurement parameters are sent to the core layer, and the measurement parameters may include the above measurement Timestamps carried in the response (for example, the moment of receiving the first measurement request and the moment of sending the first measurement response), the moment of receiving the first measurement response, the phase difference information of the above measurement response on different antennas, and the RSSI of the above measurement response .
  • the kernel layer sends the above measurement parameters to the UWB protocol stack by calling the UWB HAL interface.
  • Azimuth parameters of device 201 eg distance, signal AOA and RRSI.
  • the distance of the electronic device 201 is determined by the ranging algorithm 3 according to the time stamp carried in the measurement response, the reception time of the first measurement response, and the transmission time of the first measurement request recorded by the UWB time management module.
  • the UWB protocol stack sends the above-mentioned orientation parameters of the electronic device 201 to the UWB service of the application framework layer, and the UWB service can determine that the target device is the electronic device 201 according to the orientation parameters of multiple nearby devices.
  • the UWB service of the application framework layer determines the target device, it calls the UWB protocol stack to send the first connection request to the HAL and the kernel layer, and the UWB chip of the kernel layer drives the UWB chip to send the above connection request to the electronic device 201 .
  • the UWB service of the application framework layer may also call a Bluetooth service, a WLAN service or an infrared service to send the first connection request to the electronic device 201 .
  • the UWB service starts the Bluetooth service, calls the Bluetooth protocol stack through the Bluetooth service, and sends the first connection request to the HAL and the kernel layer.
  • the Bluetooth chip of the kernel layer drives the Bluetooth chip to send the first connection request to the electronic device 201 to request Establish a Bluetooth communication connection and perform data transmission.
  • FIG. 10B it is a UWB software framework diagram of another electronic device exemplarily provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the software framework can be on the user's electronic device (eg, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 500 in the above-mentioned embodiment), or on the smart home device (such as the electronic device 201, the electronic device 202, the electronic device 203, the electronic device 204, etc.).
  • the application layer (Android Applications) in FIG. 10B corresponds to the application layer in FIG. 10A ;
  • FIG. 10B corresponds to the API call of the application framework layer in Figure 10A;
  • the ranging service layer (Ranging Service Layer) in Figure 10B corresponds to the system service of the application framework layer in Figure 10A;
  • the UWB control interface protocol stack (UCI stack) in Figure 10B corresponds to the UWB protocol stack in Figure 10A;
  • the UWB firmware download (HBCI UWB FW download) in Figure 10B corresponds to the UWB management module in Figure 10A;
  • the time management module (TML) in Figure 10B corresponds to the UWB time management module in Figure 10A;
  • the synchronous peripheral interface driver (SPI driver) in Figure 10B corresponds to the kernel layer in Figure 10A;
  • the Hwlios HW in FIG. 10B is a UWB chip exemplarily provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the UWB positioning technology may be used to perform AOA measurement.
  • the electronic device has at least one UWB antenna, distance measurement and RRSI measurement can be implemented.
  • an embodiment of the present application exemplarily provides a hardware system architecture, which may include, but is not limited to, an application processor 901, a UWB chip 902, a radio frequency module (including a radio frequency module 903A and a radio frequency module 903B), an antenna ( Antenna 904A and Antenna 904B).
  • a hardware system architecture which may include, but is not limited to, an application processor 901, a UWB chip 902, a radio frequency module (including a radio frequency module 903A and a radio frequency module 903B), an antenna ( Antenna 904A and Antenna 904B).
  • the first end of the radio frequency module 903A and the radio frequency module 903B are both connected to the UWB chip 902, the second end of the radio frequency module 903A is connected to the antenna 904A (such as the antenna A shown in FIG. 3E), and the second end of the radio frequency module 903B is connected to Antenna 904B (eg, antenna C shown in FIG. 3E ) is connected.
  • the distance between the antenna 904A and the antenna 904B is less than half a wavelength.
  • the hardware system shown in FIG. 10C further includes that the first end of one or more other radio frequency modules is connected to the UWB chip 902 , and the second ends of the one or more radio frequency modules are respectively connected to a UWB antenna.
  • the application processor 901 starts The UWB positioning service sends a measurement instruction to the UWB chip 902 through the UWB positioning service, instructing the UWB chip 902 to measure the azimuth parameters.
  • the UWB chip 902 broadcasts the UWB measurement request through the radio frequency module (the radio frequency module 903A and/or the radio frequency module 903B) and the corresponding antenna.
  • the electronic device may perform distance measurement, AOA measurement, and RRSI measurement through the UWB chip and its corresponding antenna.
  • Electronic devices can also perform wireless data transmission through UWB chips and their corresponding antennas.
  • the hardware system shown in FIG. 10C may further include one or more of a Bluetooth chip 905 , a WLAN chip 906 , and an infrared chip 907 , any one of a Bluetooth chip 905 , a WLAN chip 906 , and an infrared chip 907 .
  • the antennas connected by any two of the UWB chip 902 , the Bluetooth chip 905 , the WLAN chip 906 , and the infrared chip 907 through the radio frequency module can be multiplexed or independent of each other.
  • the electronic device can also perform wireless data transmission through one or more of the Bluetooth chip 905 , the WLAN chip 906 , and the infrared chip 907 .
  • the UWB chip 902 can be integrated on the SOC, and the UWB chip 902 can also be integrated with other chips (eg, the Bluetooth chip 905 ).
  • the hardware system architecture may be on the user's electronic device (eg, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 500 in the above-mentioned embodiment), or may be on the smart home device (such as the electronic device 201 and the electronic device in the above-mentioned embodiment). 202, electronic device 203, electronic device 204, etc.).
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a UWB chip system architecture 900 , which may include, but is not limited to, an application processor (AP) 901 and a UWB chip 902 .
  • the application processor 901 may include a UWB positioning service 901A and a UWB protocol stack 901B, and the UWB chip 902 may include a UWB positioning management module 902A and a UWB positioning measurement module 902B.
  • the UWB positioning service 901A may be a function/service/application that requires distance measurement, AOA measurement and/or RRSI measurement.
  • the UWB chip system 900 may be on the user's electronic device (eg, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 500 in the above-mentioned embodiment), or a smart home device (such as the electronic device 201 and the electronic device 202 in the above-mentioned embodiment). , electronic device 203, electronic device 204, etc.).
  • the UWB chip system 900 may implement the following steps:
  • the UWB positioning service 901A sends a start instruction to the UWB protocol stack 901B, instructing the UWB protocol stack 901B to perform UWB positioning, that is, start the measurement of azimuth parameters (including distance measurement, AOA measurement, and RRSI measurement).
  • the UWB protocol stack 901B can send a UWB positioning broadcast instruction to the UWB positioning management module 902A to instruct the UWB positioning management module 902A to perform positioning broadcast.
  • the UWB positioning management module 902A may trigger the UWB positioning measurement module 902B to broadcast a UWB positioning measurement request (eg, a third measurement request).
  • the UWB positioning measurement module 902B may send the measurement response to the UWB positioning management module 901A after receiving the UWB positioning measurement response (eg, the third measurement response) sent by the nearby device (eg, the electronic device 201 ).
  • the nearby device eg, the electronic device 201 .
  • the UWB positioning management module 901A can analyze the measurement parameters such as the reception time of the measurement request, the transmission time of the measurement response, the phase difference information, and the RSSI of the measurement response according to the measurement response. Then, the UWB positioning management module 901A can send the above measurement parameters to the UWB positioning protocol stack 901B.
  • the UWB positioning protocol stack 901B determines the parameters of the nearby equipment through the UWB positioning algorithm (including determining the distance through the distance measurement algorithm, determining the signal AOA through the AOA measurement algorithm, and according to the above-mentioned distance and measurement response. RSSI, through which it can be determined whether the electronic device 201 is blocked).
  • the UWB protocol stack 901B can send the orientation parameter of the nearby device to the UWB positioning service 901A.
  • the UWB positioning service 901A can determine the target device according to the orientation parameters of multiple nearby devices.
  • the device control method includes but is not limited to steps S601 to S603, wherein:
  • the second device sends a first message; the first message carries the identifier of the second device; the third device sends a second message; the second message carries the identifier of the third device;
  • the second device may be the electronic device 201 in the foregoing embodiment
  • the third device may be the electronic device 202 or the electronic device 203 in the foregoing embodiment
  • the identifier of the second device may be the ID1 of the electronic device 201
  • the third device may be the ID1 of the electronic device 201.
  • the identity of the electronic device 202 may be the identity of the electronic device 202 .
  • the electronic device 201 , the electronic device 202 or the electronic device 203 may be smart home devices such as a TV, a speaker, and an air conditioner.
  • the first device may initiate a positioning measurement, and the first device may determine the signal AOA of the second device and the third device, and the first message and the second message may be UWB in the related embodiment of FIG. 5A .
  • the measurement request may also be the first measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 5C and FIG. 5F ; the above-mentioned first message and the second message may also be the fourth measurement response in the related embodiment of FIG. 8C .
  • the positioning measurement may be initiated by the second device and the third device, and the signal AOA of the second device and the third device may be determined by the first device, and the first message and the second message may be related to the implementation of FIG. 9A .
  • the UWB measurement request in the example may also be the sixth measurement request in the related embodiments of 9C.
  • the first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the received first message, and the first device determines the signal AOA of the third device based on the received second message;
  • the first device may be the electronic device 100 in the foregoing embodiment, and the identifier of the first device may be the ID2 of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may be a portable terminal device such as a smart phone, a smart bracelet, or a tablet. How to determine the signal AOA may refer to the related embodiment in FIG. 5D , which will not be repeated here.
  • the first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device; the second device performs a response operation in response to the received third message.
  • a positioning measurement may be initiated by a first device (eg, electronic device 100 ), and a second device (electronic device 201 ) and a third device may be determined by the first device (electronic device 100 ) (eg, electronic device 202) signal AOA.
  • a first device eg, electronic device 100
  • a second device electronic device 201
  • a third device may be determined by the first device (electronic device 100 ) (eg, electronic device 202) signal AOA.
  • sending the first message by the second device includes: the second device sending the first message in response to the detected voice command; sending the second message by the third device includes: the third device responding to the detection
  • the received voice command sends a second message; the second device performs a response operation in response to the received third message, including: the second device outputs response information in response to the received third message and the voice command.
  • the above-mentioned first message and second message may be the UWB measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 5A , and may also be the first measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 5C and FIG. 5F .
  • the above-mentioned third message may be the first indication information in the related embodiment of FIG. 5A .
  • the first device may also initiate a positioning measurement, and the first device may determine the signal AOA of the second device and the third device.
  • the method before the second device sends the first message, and before the third device sends the second message, the method further includes: the first device sends a fourth message in response to the detected voice instruction, and the fourth message carries the first message.
  • identification of the device sending the first message by the second device includes: the second device sending the first message to the first device based on the fourth message; sending the second message by the third device includes: the third device sending the second message based on the fourth message , sending a second message to the first device; the second device performing a response operation in response to the received third message includes: the second device outputting response information in response to the received third message and the voice command.
  • a smart home device eg, a TV, a speaker
  • the user can point the mobile phone to the target device and speak a voice command.
  • the measurement of the signal AOA can be initiated, and the user's mobile phone can calculate the signal AOA of each smart home device.
  • the mobile phone can determine the target device of the user according to the signal AOA of each smart home device. Accurately control one of several smart home devices with easy operation.
  • a positioning measurement may be initiated by the first device, and the signal AOA of the second device and the third device may be determined by the first device.
  • the method before the second device sends the first message, and before the third device sends the second message, the method further includes: the first device sends a fourth message in response to the detected first user operation, and the fourth message carries The identifier of the first device; the sending of the first message by the second device includes: the second device sends the first message to the first device based on the fourth message; the sending of the second message by the third device includes: the third device sends the first message based on the fourth message.
  • Four messages sending a second message to the first device.
  • the above-mentioned fourth message may be the UWB measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 8A , and may also be the fourth measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 8C .
  • the above-mentioned first message and second message may be the fourth measurement response in the related embodiment of FIG. 8C .
  • the above-mentioned third message may be the connection request in the related embodiment of FIG. 8A , and the third message is used to instruct the second device to send connection parameters.
  • a positioning measurement may be initiated by the second device and the third device, and the signal AOA of the second device and the third device may be determined by the first device.
  • the above-mentioned first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the received first message, and the first device determines the signal AOA of the third device based on the received second message, including: in response to detecting The received first user operation, the first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the second device based on the received first message, and determines the signal AOA of the third device based on the received second message.
  • the above-mentioned first message and second message may be the UWB measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 9A , and may also be the sixth measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 9C .
  • a smart home device eg TV, speaker
  • the user can point the mobile phone to the target device and perform the first user operation.
  • the measurement of the signal AOA can be initiated, and the mobile phone can calculate the signal AOA of each smart home device.
  • each smart home device periodically initiates positioning measurement, and when the user's mobile phone detects the first user operation, the signal AOA of each smart home device is calculated in response to the positioning measurement sent by each smart home device.
  • the mobile phone can determine the target device of the user according to the signal AOA of each smart home device. Control one of several smart home devices with simple operation.
  • the method before the first device sends the third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, the method further includes: the first device determines the first message based on the received first message. The distance of the second device; the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the received second message; the first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, The method includes: the first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device and the distance of the third device.
  • the first device can determine the first device (electronic device 100 ) and the second device (electronic device 201 ) according to the received signal ) or the distance of the third device (electronic device 202). In this way, the target device in the second device and the third device can be determined from the two dimensions of the signal AOA and the distance, which improves the possibility of accurately controlling the target device in multiple devices.
  • the method before the first device sends the third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, the method further includes: the first device determines the first message based on the received first message.
  • the received signal strength of the second device indicates the RRSI; the first device determines the RRSI of the third device based on the received second message; the first device sends the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device to the second device
  • the third message includes: based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, and the RRSI of the third device, to the third device.
  • the second device sends a third message.
  • the target device in the second device and the third device can be determined from the three dimensions of signal AOA, distance and RRSI, which improves the possibility of accurately controlling the target device in multiple devices.
  • the first device can determine the first device (electronic device 100 ) and the second device (electronic device 201 ) according to the received signal ) or the RRSI of the third device (electronic device 202).
  • the target device in the second device and the third device can be determined from the three dimensions of signal AOA, distance, and RRSI, which improves the possibility of accurately controlling the target device in multiple devices.
  • the above-mentioned first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, including: the first device determines the signal AOA in the second device and the third device When the device closest to 0 degrees is the second device, the first device sends a third message to the second device.
  • the first device when the first device determines that the device whose signal AOA is closest to the preset angle among the second device and the third device is the second device, the first device sends the third message to the second device.
  • the preset angle may be determined according to the distribution of the UWB antenna used to determine the signal AOA on the first device, and specifically, reference may be made to the related embodiment of FIG. 5D .
  • the preset angle may be 0 degrees, 90 degrees.
  • the above-mentioned first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, and the distance of the third device, including: when the first device When the difference between the signal AOA of the second device and the third device is greater than the first threshold, and the first device determines that the device with the smallest signal AOA among the second device and the third device is the second device, the first device sends the third device to the second device.
  • the first device sends The second device sends the third message.
  • the first device sends The second device sends the third message.
  • the above-mentioned first device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, and the RRSI of the third device, to the The second device sends the third message, including: when the RRSI of the second device is greater than the preset RRSI and the RRSI of the third device is less than or equal to the preset RRSI, the first device sends the third message to the second device; When both the RRSI of the second device and the RRSI of the third device are greater than or equal to the preset RRSI, and the AOA difference between the signals of the second device and the third device is greater than the first threshold, the first device determines that the second device and the third device The device with the smallest signal AOA is the second device, and the first device sends a third message to the second device; or, when both the RRSI of the second device and the RRSI of the third device are greater
  • the second threshold is equal to the first threshold.
  • the first threshold is equal to 10 degrees.
  • the second threshold is not equal to the first threshold.
  • the first threshold is equal to 25 degrees and the second threshold is equal to 20 degrees.
  • a ranging algorithm in which the first device initiates the positioning measurement and the first device calculates the distance reference may be made to the ranging algorithm 3 and the ranging algorithm 4 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the ranging algorithm in which the second device and the third device initiate the positioning measurement and the first device calculates the distance reference may be made to the ranging algorithm 1 and the ranging algorithm 2 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned first device determines the distance of the second device based on the received first message; before the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the received second message, the method further includes: the first device receives The first message sends the fifth message to the second device; the second device receives the fifth message and sends the sixth message to the first device; the first device receives the second message and sends the seventh message to the second device; The second device receives the seventh message and sends the eighth message to the first device; the first device determines the distance of the second device based on the received first message; the first device determines the distance of the third device based on the received second message
  • the distance includes: the first device determines the distance of the second device based on the sending and receiving moments of the first message, the fifth message and the sixth message; the first device determines the distance based on the sending and receiving moments of the second message, the seventh message and the eighth message The distance to the third device.
  • the second device eg, electronic device 201
  • the first device eg, electronic device 100
  • the first message may be the first measurement request in the embodiment of FIG. 5F
  • the fifth message may be the first measurement response in the embodiment of FIG. 5F
  • the sixth message may be the second measurement response in the embodiment of FIG. 5F .
  • the second device eg, electronic device 201
  • the first device eg, electronic device 100
  • the first message may be the sixth measurement request of the embodiment of FIG. 9C
  • the fifth message may be the sixth measurement response of the embodiment of FIG. 5F
  • the sixth message may be the seventh measurement response of the embodiment of FIG. 5F .
  • the method further includes: the first device sends a ninth message to the second device; the second device receives the ninth message ; The first device determines the distance of the second device based on the sending and receiving moments of the first message, the fifth message and the sixth message, including: the first device is based on the sending and receiving of the first message, the fifth message, the sixth message and the ninth message. At the moment, the distance of the second device is determined.
  • the second device such as the electronic device 201
  • the first device measures the distance. calculate.
  • the first message may be the first measurement request in the embodiment of FIG. 5C
  • the fifth message may be the first measurement response in the embodiment of FIG. 5C
  • the ninth message may be the second measurement request in the embodiment of FIG. 5C
  • the sixth message It may be the second measurement response of the embodiment of Figure 5C.
  • the above-mentioned sixth message carries the moment when the second device sends the first message, receives the fifth message, and sends the sixth message.
  • the above-mentioned sixth message carries the moment when the second device sends the first message, receives the fifth message, receives the ninth message, and sends the sixth message.
  • the sending moment of the first message may also be carried by the first message.
  • the method before the first device sends the third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, the method further includes: the fourth device sends a tenth message; the tenth message carries a The identifier of the fourth device; the first device determines the signal angle of arrival AOA of the fourth device based on the received tenth message; the above-mentioned first device sends the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device.
  • the third message includes: the first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, and the signal AOA of the fourth device.
  • the fourth device may be the electronic device 202 or the electronic device 203 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the positioning measurement may be initiated by the first device, and the signal AOA of the fourth device may be determined by the first device.
  • the above tenth message may be the UWB measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 5A , or may be the request of FIG. 5C . and the first measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 5F ; the above tenth message may also be the fourth measurement response in the related embodiment of FIG. 8C .
  • positioning measurement may be initiated by the fourth device, and the signal AOA of the fourth device may be determined by the fourth device.
  • the above tenth message may be the UWB measurement request in the related embodiment of FIG. 9A , or may be related to 9C The sixth measurement request in the embodiment.
  • the method before the first device sends the third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, the method further includes: the first device determines the first device based on the received tenth message. The distance and RRSI of four devices; the above-mentioned first device sends a third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, including: the first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device, the second device The distance of the device, the signal AOA of the third device, and the distance of the third device, send a third message to the second device.
  • the target device in the second device, the third device and the fourth device can be determined from the three dimensions of the signal AOA, distance and RRSI, which improves the possibility of accurately controlling the target device in multiple devices.
  • the method before the first device sends the third message to the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device, the method further includes: the first device determines the first message based on the received first message.
  • the received signal strength of the second device indicates the RRSI; the first device determines the RRSI of the third device based on the received second message; the first device sends the second device based on the signal AOA of the second device and the signal AOA of the third device to the second device
  • the third message includes: the first device is based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, the RRSI of the third device, the fourth The distance of the device and the RRSI of the fourth device, send a third message to the second device.
  • the target device in the second device, the third device and the fourth device can be determined from the three dimensions of the signal AOA, distance and RRSI, which
  • the first device described above is based on the signal AOA of the second device, the distance of the second device, the RRSI of the second device, the signal AOA of the third device, the distance of the third device, the distance of the third device.
  • the RRSI of the fourth device, the distance of the fourth device, and the RRSI of the fourth device send a third message to the second device, including: the second device, the third device, and the fourth device when only the RRSI of the second device is greater than the preset RRSI , the first device sends a third message to the second device; or, when the number of devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI in the second device, the third device, and the fourth device is greater than 1, determine that the second device, the third device, the fourth device Among the devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI, the two devices whose signal AOA is closest to the preset angle; when the number of devices whose RRSI is greater than the prese
  • the two devices whose signal AOA is closest to the preset angle when the difference between the signal AOA of the two devices is greater than the first threshold, determine the device with the smallest signal AOA among the two devices as the second device , the first device sends a third message to the second device; or, when the number of devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI in the second device, the third device, and the fourth device is greater than 1, determine that the second device, the third device, the fourth device Among the devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI, the two devices whose signal AOA is closest to the preset angle; when the number of devices whose RRSI is greater than the preset RRSI in the second device, the third device, and the fourth device is equal to zero, the second device is determined.
  • the signal AOA is closest to the two devices of the preset angle, and when the AOA difference of the two devices is less than or equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the device with the smallest distance in the two devices is the second device,
  • the first device sends a third message to the second device.
  • the target device among the multiple devices according to the signal AOA, distance, and RRSI reference may be made to the related embodiments in FIG. 5G and FIG. 5H .
  • the above-mentioned embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state drives), and the like.
  • the process can be completed by instructing the relevant hardware by a computer program, and the program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the program When the program is executed , which may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random storage memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk and other mediums that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Audiology, Speech & Language Pathology (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computational Linguistics (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

公开了一种设备控制方法，其特征在于，所述方法应用于通信系统，所述通信系统包括：第一设备、第二设备、第三设备，第一设备、第二设备和第三设备使用近距离无线通信技术通信，方法包括：第二设备发送第一消息；第一消息携带第二设备的标识；第三设备发送第二消息；第二消息携带第三设备的标识；第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA；第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA；第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息；第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息执行响应操作。本申请实施例可以通过简易的操作实现多设备间的协调控制，有效提升用户体验。

Description

一种设备控制方法及相关装置
本申请要求于2020年07月09日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010658726.X、申请名称为“一种设备控制方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及电子技术领域，尤其涉及一种设备控制方法及相关装置。
背景技术
随着技术的发展，智能家居设备越来越普及化。用户在家中对特定智能家居设备进行语音唤醒时，可能家中会有多个智能家居设备进行响应。由于智能家居设备无法真正感知用户真实的意图，不能实现多设备的精确唤醒与控制。例如：家中有多个华为设备(机顶盒，音箱，电视等等)时，用户呼叫华为设备“小艺，小艺”，所有接收到用户语音指令的华为设备可能都会被唤醒并响应，对用户造成困扰。此外，用户意图通过手机与特定智能家居设备进行连接配对时，需要用户针对多个智能家居设备通过繁琐的手动操作才能配对。
综上所述，目前不能通过简易的操作实现多个设备的协调控制，用户体验差。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种设备控制方法及相关装置，可以通过简易的操作实现多设备间的协调控制，有效提升用户体验。
第一方面，本申请提供了一种设备控制方法，所述方法应用于通信系统，所述通信系统包括：第一设备、第二设备、第三设备，第一设备、第二设备和第三设备使用近距离无线通信技术通信，方法包括：
第二设备发送第一消息；第一消息携带第二设备的标识；第三设备发送第二消息；第二消息携带第三设备的标识；第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角(Angle of Arrival，AOA)，第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA；第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息；第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息执行响应操作。
本申请提供一种数据分享的方法，第一设备可以根据第二设备和第三设备发送的消息分别获取第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，然后可以基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，确定第一设备的目标设备(例如第二设备)，并通过第三消息第二设备执行响应操作。这样，可以通过简易的操作实现多设备间的协调控制，有效提升了用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第二设备发送第一消息，包括：第二设备响应于检测到的语音命令，发送第一消息；上述第三设备发送第二消息，包括：第三设备响应于检测到的语音命令，发送第二消息；上述第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息执行响应操作，包括：第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息和语音命令输出响应信息。这样，第二设备和第三设备响应于上述语音命令，可以发起AOA测量，基于第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA确 定的目标设备也可以响应上述语音命令，因此，通过简易的操作即可准确控制第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第二设备发送第一消息之前，以及第三设备发送第二消息之前，还包括：第一设备响应于检测到的语音指令发送第四消息，第四消息携带第一设备的标识；上述第二设备发送第一消息，包括：第二设备基于第四消息，向第一设备发送第一消息；上述第三设备发送第二消息，包括：第三设备基于第四消息，向第一设备发送第二消息；上述第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息执行响应操作，包括：第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息和语音命令输出响应信息。这样，第一设备响应于上述语音命令，可以发起AOA测量，基于第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA确定的目标设备也可以响应上述语音命令，因此，通过简易的操作即可准确控制第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第二设备发送第一消息之前，以及第三设备发送第二消息之前，还包括：第一设备响应于检测到的第一用户操作发送第四消息，第四消息携带第一设备的标识；上述第二设备发送第一消息，包括：第二设备基于第四消息，向第一设备发送第一消息；上述第三设备发送第二消息，包括：第三设备基于第四消息，向第一设备发送第二消息。这样，第一设备响应于第一用户操作，可以发起AOA测量，基于第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA确定的目标设备也可以响应上述语音命令因此，通过简易的操作即可准确控制第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA，第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA，包括：响应于接收到的所述第一用户操作，上述第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA，基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA。这样，第二设备和第三设备可以定时发起AOA测量，当第一设备检测到第一用户操作时，第一设备可以确定根据第二设备和第三设备发送的消息，确定第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA，基于第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA确定的目标设备也可以响应上述语音命令，因此，通过简易的操作即可准确控制第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的距离；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，可以从信号AOA和距离两个维度来确定第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的接收信号强度指示(Received Signal Strength Indication，RRSI)；第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的RRSI；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离和第三设备的 RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，可以从信号AOA、距离和RRSI三个维度来确定第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最接近0度的设备为第二设备时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，根据第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA就可以确定目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：当第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值，且第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最小的设备为第二设备时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值，且第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中距离最小的设备为第二设备时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，根据第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA、第二设备和第三设备的距离就可以确定目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离和第三设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：当第二设备的RRSI大于预设RRSI，且第三设备的RRSI小于等于预设RRSI时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备的RRSI和第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于预设RRSI，且第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值时，第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最小的设备为第二设备，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备的RRSI和第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于预设RRSI，且第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值时，第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中距离最小的设备为第二设备，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，根据第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA、第二设备和第三设备的距离、第二设备和第三设备的RRSI就可以确定目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的距离之前，还包括：
第一设备接收到第一消息，向第二设备发送第五消息；第二设备接收到第五消息，向第一设备发送第六消息；第一设备接收到第二消息，向第二设备发送第七消息；第二设备接收到第七消息，向第一设备发送第八消息；第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的距离；上述第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的距离，包括：第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于第二消息、第七消息和第八消息的收发时刻，确定第三设备的距离。这样，基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻确定第二设备的距离，基于第二消息、第七消息和第八消息的收发时刻确定第三设备的距离，可以提高距离测量的精度。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第二设备接收到第五消息之后，向第一设备发送第六消息之前，还包括：第一设备向第二设备发送第九消息；上述第二设备接收第九消息；第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息，确定第二设备的距离，包括：第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息、第六消息和第九消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离。这样，基 于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻确定第二设备的距离，基于第一消息、第五消息、第六消息和第九消息的收发时刻确定第二设备的距离，可以提高距离测量的精度。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第六消息携带第二设备发送第一消息、接收第五消息、发送第六消息的时刻。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第六消息携带第二设备发送第一消息、接收第五消息、接收第九消息、发送第六消息的时刻。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第四设备发送第十消息；第十消息携带第四设备的标识；第一设备基于接收到的第十消息确定第四设备的信号到达角AOA；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第三设备的信号AOA和第四设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第十消息确定第四设备的距离和RRSI；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，向第二设备发送第三消息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的接收信号强度指示RRSI；上述第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的RRSI；第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离、第三设备的RRSI、第四设备的距离和第四设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离、第三设备的RRSI、第四设备的距离和第四设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中仅有第二设备的RRSI大于预设RRSI时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备数量大于1时，确定第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备中，信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个设备；第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备数量等于零时，确定第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个设备，当两个设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值时，确定两个设备中信号AOA最小的设备为第二设备，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备数量大于1时，确定第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备中，信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个设备；第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备数量等于零时，确定第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个设备，当两个设备的AOA差值小于等于第二阈值时，确定两个设备中 距离最小的设备为第二设备，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。
第二方面，本申请提供了一种数据分享的方法，包括：第一设备接收第二设备发送的第一消息；第一消息携带第二设备的标识；第一设备接收第三设备发送的第二消息；第二消息携带第三设备的标识；第一设备基于第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA；第一设备基于第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA；第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息；第三消息用于指示第二设备执行响应操作。
本申请提供一种数据分享的方法，第一设备可以根据第二设备和第三设备发送的消息分别获取第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，然后可以基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，确定第一设备的目标设备(例如第二设备)，并通过第三消息第二设备执行响应操作。这样，可以通过简易的操作实现多设备间的协调控制，有效提升了用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一消息是第二设备响应于检测到的语音命令发送的；第二消息是第二设备响应于检测到的语音命令发送的；第三消息用于指示第二设备响应语音命令输出响应信息。这样，第二设备和第三设备响应于上述语音命令，可以发起AOA测量，基于第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA确定的目标设备也可以响应上述语音命令，因此，通过简易的操作即可准确控制第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备接收所述第二设备发送的第一消息之前，以及所述第一设备接收所述第三设备发送的第二消息之前，还包括：所述第一设备响应于检测到的所述语音命令发送第四消息，所述第四消息携带所述第一设备的标识；所述第一消息是所述第二设备基于所述第四消息发送的；所述第二消息是所述第三设备基于所述第四消息发送的；所述第三消息用于指示所述第二设备响应所述语音命令输出响应信息。这样，第一设备响应于上述语音命令，可以发起AOA测量，基于第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA确定的目标设备也可以响应上述语音命令，因此，通过简易的操作即可准确控制第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备接收第二设备发送的第一消息之前，以及第一设备接收第三设备发送的第二消息之前，还包括：第一设备响应于检测到的第一用户操作发送第四消息，第四消息携带第一设备的标识；第一消息是第二设备基于第四消息发送的；第二消息是第三设备基于第四消息发送的。这样，第一设备响应于第一用户操作，可以发起AOA测量，基于第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA确定的目标设备也可以响应上述语音命令因此，通过简易的操作即可准确控制第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的信号到达角AOA；所述第一设备基于所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的信号AOA，包括：响应于接收到的所述第一用户操作，所述第一设备基于所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的信号到达角AOA，基于所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的信号AOA。这样，第二设备和第三设备可以定时发起AOA测量，当第一设备检测到第一用户操作时，第一设备可以确定根据第二设备和第三设备发送的消息，确定第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA，基于第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA确定的目标设备也可以响应上述语音命令，因此，通过简易的操作即可准确控制第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于第一消息确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于第二消息确定第三设备的距离；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，可以从信号AOA和距离两个维度来确定第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于第一消息确定第二设备的接收信号强度指示RRSI；第一设备基于第二消息确定第三设备的RRSI；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离和第三设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，可以从信号AOA、距离和RRSI三个维度来确定第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最接近0度的设备为第二设备时，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，根据第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA就可以确定目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：当第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值，且第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最小的设备为第二设备时，向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值，且第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中距离最小的设备为第二设备时，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，根据第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA、第二设备和第三设备的距离就可以确定目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离和第三设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：当第二设备的RRSI大于预设RRSI，且第三设备的RRSI小于等于预设RRSI时，向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备的RRSI和第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于预设RRSI，且第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值时，第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最小的设备为第二设备，向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备的RRSI和第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于预设RRSI，且第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值时，第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中距离最小的设备为第二设备，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，根据第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA、第二设备和第三设备的距离、第二设备和第三设备的RRSI就可以确定目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备基于第一消息确定第二设备的距离；第一设 备基于第二消息确定第三设备的距离之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第一消息，向第二设备发送第五消息；第一设备接收第二设备发送的第六消息；第一设备基于接收到的第二消息，向第二设备发送第七消息；第一设备接收第三设备发送的第八消息；上述第一设备基于第一消息确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于第二消息确定第三设备的距离，包括：第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于第二消息、第七消息和第八消息的收发时刻，确定第三设备的距离。这样，基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻确定第二设备的距离，基于第二消息、第七消息和第八消息的收发时刻确定第三设备的距离，可以提高距离测量的精度。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一设备接收第二设备发送的第六消息之前，还包括：第一设备向第二设备发送第九消息；上述第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离，包括：第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息、第六消息和第九消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离。这样，基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻确定第二设备的距离，基于第一消息、第五消息、第六消息和第九消息的收发时刻确定第二设备的距离，可以提高距离测量的精度。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第六消息携带第二设备发送第一消息、接收第五消息、发送第六消息的时刻。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第六消息携带第二设备发送第一消息、接收第五消息、接收第九消息、发送第六消息的时刻。
第三方面，本申请提供了一种终端，所述终端为第一设备，所述终端包括：处理器、近距离无线通信模块、存储器；其中，处理器和存储器耦合，处理器与近距离无线通信模块连接；上述近距离无线通信模块，用于接收第二设备发送的第一消息；第一消息携带第二设备的标识；上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于接收第三设备发送的第二消息；第二消息携带第三设备的标识；上述处理器，用于基于第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA；上述处理器，还用于基于第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA；上述处理器，还用于基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，确定第二设备为目标设备；上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于向第二设备发送第三消息；第三消息用于指示第二设备执行响应操作。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述终端还包括：两个UWB天线，近距离无线通信模块为UWB通信模块，UWB通信模块与两个UWB天线连接；上述近距离无线通信模块，具体用于通过两个UWB天线接收第二设备发送的第一消息；上述近距离无线通信模块，具体用于通过两个UWB天线接收第三设备发送的第二消息；上述处理器，具体用于基于第一消息在两个UWB天线上的相位差确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA；上述处理器，具体用于基于第二消息在两个UWB天线上的相位差确定第三设备的信号AOA；
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一消息是第二设备响应于检测到的语音命令发送的；第二消息是第二设备响应于检测到的语音命令发送的；第三消息用于指示第二设备响应语音命令输出响应信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在近距离无线通信模块接收第二设备发送的第一消息，以及接收第三设备发送的第二消息之前，上述处理器，还用于：响应于检测到的所述语音命令向近距离无线通信模块发送第一指令；上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于基于第一指令 发送第四消息，所述第四消息携带所述第一设备的标识；所述第一消息是所述第二设备基于所述第四消息发送的；所述第二消息是所述第三设备基于所述第四消息发送的；所述第三消息用于指示所述第二设备响应所述语音命令输出响应信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在近距离无线通信模块接收第二设备发送的第一消息，以及接收第三设备发送的第二消息之前，上述处理器，还用于：响应于检测到的第一用户操作向近距离无线通信模块发送第一指令；上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于基于第一指令发送第四消息，第四消息携带第一设备的标识；第一消息是第二设备基于第四消息发送的；第二消息是第三设备基于第四消息发送的。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述处理器，具体用于：响应于接收到的所述第一用户操作，基于所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的信号到达角AOA，基于所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的信号AOA。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述处理器在基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，确定第二设备为目标设备之前，还用于：基于第一消息确定第二设备的距离；基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的距离；上述处理器，具体用于：基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，确定第二设备为目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述处理器在基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，确定第二设备为目标设备之前，还用于：基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的接收信号强度指示RRSI；基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的RRSI；上述处理器，具体用于：基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离和第三设备的RRSI，确定第二设备为目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述处理器，具体用于：确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最接近0度的第二设备为目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述处理器，具体用于：当第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值时，确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最小的第二设备为目标设备；当第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值时，确定第二设备和第三设备中距离最小的第二设备为目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述处理器，具体用于：当第二设备的RRSI大于预设RRSI，且第三设备的RRSI小于等于预设RRSI时，确定第二设备为目标设备；当第二设备的RRSI和第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于预设RRSI，且第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值时，确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最小的第二设备为目标设备；当第二设备的RRSI和第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于预设RRSI，且第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值时，确定第二设备和第三设备中距离最小的第二设备为目标设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在处理器基于第一消息确定第二设备的距离，以及基于第二消息确定第三设备的距离之前，上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于：
在接收第一消息之后，向第二设备发送第五消息；上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于接收第二设备发送的第六消息；上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于在接收第二消息之后，向第三设备发送第七消息；上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于接收第三设备发送的第八消 息；上述处理器，具体用于：基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离；基于第二消息、第七消息和第八消息的收发时刻，确定第三设备的距离。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述近距离无线通信模块，还用于：在接收第二设备发送的第六消息之前，向第二设备发送第九消息；上述处理器，具体用于：基于第一消息、第五消息、第六消息和第九消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第六消息携带第二设备发送第一消息、接收第五消息、发送第六消息的时刻。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第六消息携带第二设备发送第一消息、接收第五消息、接收第九消息、发送第六消息的时刻。
第四方面，本申请提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统可以设置在第一设备、第二设备、第三设备中，以第一设备为例，该芯片系统包括：处理器和UWB芯片。其中，上述UWB芯片可以通过UWB天线接收第二设备发送的第一消息；第一消息携带第二设备的标识；上述UWB芯片还可以通过UWB天线接收第三设备发送的第二消息；第二消息携带第三设备的标识；上述处理器，用于基于第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA；上述处理器，还用于基于第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA；上述处理器，还用于基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，确定第二设备为目标设备；上述UWB芯片还可以通过UWB天线向第二设备发送第三消息；第三消息用于指示第二设备执行响应操作。
本申请提供一种芯片系统，该芯片系统可以设置于第一设备中。第一设备通过UWB定位测量技术，测量第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA。然后，第一终端可以根据第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA，确定第一设备的目标设备(例如第二设备)，并通过第三消息第二设备执行响应操作。这样，可以通过简易的操作实现多设备间的协调控制，有效提升了用户体验。
第五方面，本申请提供了一种通信装置，包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。该一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合，一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时，使得通信装置执行上述第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中的设备控制方法。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质，包括计算机指令，当计算机指令在电子设备上运行时，使得通信装置执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的设备控制方法。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品，当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的设备控制方法。
附图说明
图1A和图1B为本申请实施例提供的一种语音交互场景的场景示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构示意图；
图3A为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的结构示意图；
图3B为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的坐标系示意图；
图3C至图3E为本申请实施例提供的UWB天线分布示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种电子设备的结构示意图；
图5A为本申请实施例提供的一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图5B为本申请实施例提供的一种测距算法1的示意图；
图5C为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图5D为本申请实施例提供的一种信号AOA的示意图；
图5E为本申请实施例提供的一种测距算法2的示意图；
图5F为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图5G为本申请实施例提供的一种确定目标设备的流程示意图；
图5H为本申请实施例提供的另一种确定目标设备的流程示意图；
图6A为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图6B为本申请实施例提供的一种测距算法3的示意图；
图6C为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图6D为本申请实施例提供的一种测距算法4的示意图；
图6E为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图7A为本申请实施例提供的一种配对连接场景的场景示意图；
图7B至图7E为本申请实施例提供的一种配对连接的界面示意图；
图7F为本申请实施例提供的另一种配对连接场景的场景示意图；
图7G为本申请实施例提供的另一种配对连接的界面示意图；
图8A为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图8B为本申请实施例提供的另一种测距算法3的示意图；
图8C为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图8D为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图8E为本申请实施例提供的另一种测距算法2的示意图；
图8F为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图9A为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图9B为本申请实施例提供的另一种测距算法2的示意图；
图9C为本申请实施例提供的另一种设备控制方法的流程示意图；
图9D为本申请实施例提供的另一种测距算法1的示意图；
图10A和图10B为本申请实施例提供的软件架构示意图；
图10C为本申请实施例提供的硬件系统的结构示意图；
图10D为本申请实施例提供的UWB芯片系统的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行地描述。其中，在本申请实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“/”表示或的意思，例如，A/B可以表示A或B；文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况，另外，在本申请实施例的描述中，“多个”是指两个或多于两个。
以下，术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的，而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此，限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征，在本申请实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。
目前，智能家居设备越来越普及化，用户住房内可能存在多个智能家居设备，例如音箱、电视机、空调等。
在一种实现方式中，一定区域内的多个智能家居设备可以接入网络(例如局域网、互联网。)，以实现与云端或者其他设备交互。用户可以通过智能家居设备获取在线或本地信息，例如，用户可以控制音箱、电视机等家居设备，以获取新闻、天气、出行，播放歌曲，上网购物等。用户还可以通过指定智能家居设备控制其他智能家居设备，例如，用户可以通过控制音箱，以实现开关灯、开关窗帘等。
目前，用户可以通过语音、手势等方式与智能家居设备进行交互。例如，用户可以通过语音唤醒智能家居设备，然后通过语音、手势等方式实现对该设备的控制。
可以理解，能够采用语音交互的电子设备，通常可以包括麦克风并具备语音识别能力，以实现对采集到的环境声音进行语音识别。在一些实施例中，智能家居设备的应用处理器(Application Processor，AP)保持上电，麦克风将采集到的语音信息发送给AP。AP识别上述语音信息，并可以执行上述语音信息对应操作。例如，AP识别上述语音信息包括预设唤醒词时，生成相应的响应信息(例如，语音信息“我在”)。在一些实施例中，电子设备的麦克风连接微处理器，微处理器保持上电，电子设备的AP未上电。麦克风将采集到的语音信息发送给微处理器，微处理器识别上述语音信息，并根据上述语音信息确定是否唤醒AP，即给AP上电。例如，微处理器识别上述语音信息包括预设唤醒词时，唤醒AP。其中，预设唤醒词可以是出厂前电子设备默认设置的，也可以是用户根据自身需要在电子设备中预先设置的，此处不做具体限定。
本申请实施例提供了一种设备控制方法，所提方法中，用户在说出语音指令(例如预设唤醒词)时，将电子设备100指向附近的多个智能家居设备中的目标设备。接收并识别出上述语音指令的智能家居设备发起方位参数的测量。根据多个智能家居设备的方位参数可以确定用户指向的目标设备，并由目标设备响应用户的唤醒。智能家居设备的方位参数可以包括该设备与电子设备100间的距离、电子设备100上该设备的信号AOA、接收信号强度(receive signal strength indicator，RSSI)，其中，RSSI可以用于确定该设备与电子设备100间是否有遮挡。针对多个智能家居设备的场景，所提方法可以提高准确控制家居设备的可能性，提升了用户体验。
示例性的，如图1A所示，用户附近有多个智能家居设备，例如音箱201、冰箱202、电视机203、空调204等。上述多个智能家居设备中至少有两个设备的唤醒词相同，例如音箱201、冰箱202、电视机203、空调204的唤醒词相同(例如“小艺，小艺”)。用户意图唤醒上述多个智能家居设备中的音箱201时，用户将电子设备100(例如，智能手环)指向音箱201，并说出上述音箱201的唤醒词“小艺，小艺”。上述多个智能家居设备中接收并检测到唤醒词的设备，分别发起方位参数(即相对于智能手环的方位参数)的测量。根据多个智能家居设备的方位参数确定用户指向的目标设备为音箱201后，电子设备100向音 箱201发送指示信息，以指示音箱201响应用户的唤醒词。如图1A所示，音箱201接收到上述指示信息后，发出语音信息“我在”。
在一些实施例中，音箱201响应用户的唤醒后，将由音箱响应用户的指令(例如语音指令、手势指令等)，与用户进行交互，直到用户唤醒其他智能家居设备。示例性的，如图1B所示，用户听到音箱的响应后，说出“龙岗今天天气”。多个智能家居设备均可以接收并检测到语音信息“龙岗今天天气”，只有被唤醒的音箱201根据上述语音信息“龙岗今天天气”，通过网络查询龙岗今天天气，并根据查询结果发出语音信息“龙岗今天晴，25度到32度，南风3级”。
需要注意的是，图1A和图1B示出的场景仅仅是为了举例说明一种多设备的场景，并不是对本申请的限制，在各种实施场景中，可以包括与图中示出的不同数量和/或不同类型的设备，例如，可以包括更多或更少的设备，或者包括与图1A和图1B中示出的设备不同的其他设备。
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统(例如智能家居系统)。智能家居系统可以通过物联网技术将家中的各种设备(如音视频设备、空调控制、照明系统、窗帘控制、数字影院系统等)连接到一起，提供家电控制、照明控制、室内外遥控、环境监测以及定时控制等多种功能和手段。用户也可以通过在电子设备100(例如手机、智能手环等)上安装的智能家居APP可以对家中的各种设备进行控制。
请参照图2，图2示例性地示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种通信系统300示意图。如图2所示，该通信系统300包括电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203、电子设备204等。电子设备100可以辅助用户选择和控制家中各种智能家居设备(例如音箱、电视机、冰箱、空调等等)。其中，
电子设备(例如电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203或电子设备204)具有超宽带(ultra wide band，UWB)通信模块，还可以具有蓝牙通信模块、WLAN通信模块和红外线通信模块中的一项或多项。以电子设备100为例，电子设备100可以通过UWB通信模块、蓝牙通信模块、WLAN通信模块和红外线通信模块中的一项或多项发射信号来探测、扫描电子设备100附近的电子设备(例如电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203或电子设备204)，使得电子设备100可以通过UWB、蓝牙、WLAN和红外线中的一种或多种近距离无线通信协议发现附近的电子设备，并与附近的电子设备建立无线通信连接，并可以传输数据至附近的电子设备。
本申请对电子设备(例如电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203或电子设备204)的类型不做具体限定，在一些实施例中，本申请实施例中的电子设备可以是手机、可穿戴设备(例如，智能手环)、平板电脑、膝上型计算机(laptop)、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer，UMPC)、蜂窝电话、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、增强现实(Augmented reality，AR)\虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备等便携设备。还可以是音箱、电视机、冰箱、空调、车载设备、打印机、投影仪等设备。电子设备的示例性实施例包括但不限于搭载
Figure PCTCN2021105455-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021105455-appb-000002
或者其它操作系统的电子设备。
在一种可能实现方式中，电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203 和电子设备204间可以直接通信。在一种可能实现方式中，电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203和电子设备204可以通过有线或无线保真(wireless fidelity，WiFi)连接的方式连接至局域网(local area network，LAN)。例如，电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203和电子设备204均连接到同一个电子设备301，电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203和电子设备204可以通过电子设备301间接通信。该电子设备301可以是电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203和电子设备204中的一个，还可以是额外的第三方设备，例如是路由器、云端服务器、网关、智能设备控制器等。其中，云端服务器可以是硬件服务器，也可以植入虚拟化环境中，例如，云端服务器可以是在可以包括一个或多个其他虚拟机的硬件服务器上执行的虚拟机。电子设备301可以通过网络向电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203和电子设备204发送数据，也可以接收电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203和电子设备204发送的数据。
电子设备301可以包括有存储器、处理器和收发器。其中，存储器可以用于存储语音唤醒词和UWB定位的相关程序；存储器还可以用于存储通过UWB定位技术获取的电子设备(例如，电子设备201)的方位参数；存储器还可以用于存储经由电子设备301交换的消息、电子设备100和附近设备相关的数据和/或配置。处理器可以用于当获取局域网中多个附近设备的方位参数时，根据多个附近设备的方位参数中，确定出响应的目标设备。收发器可用于与连接到局域网的电子设备进行通信。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，多个附近可以连接至同一个局域网，也可以不连接至同一个局域网，此处不做具体限定。
可以理解的，本实施例示出的结构并不构成对通信系统300的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，通信系统300可以包括比图示更多或更少的设备。
下面，介绍本申请实施例中涉及的电子设备100。
参见图3A，图3A示出了本申请实施例提供的示例性电子设备100的结构示意图。
电子设备100可以包括处理器110，外部存储器接口120，内部存储器121，通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口130，充电管理模块140，电源管理模块141，电池142，天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，传感器模块180，按键190，马达191，指示器192，摄像头193，显示屏194，以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module，SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A，陀螺仪传感器180B，气压传感器180C，磁传感器180D，加速度传感器180E，距离传感器180F，接近光传感器180G，指纹传感器180H，温度传感器180J，触摸传感器180K，环境光传感器180L，骨传导传感器180M等。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元，例如：处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor，AP)，调制解调处理器，图形处理器(graphics processing unit，GPU)， 图像信号处理器(image signal processor，ISP)，控制器，存储器，视频编解码器，数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，基带处理器，和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit，NPU)等。其中，不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件，也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。
其中，控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号，产生操作控制信号，完成取指令和执行指令的控制。
NPU可以利用进行卷积神经网络(Convolutional Neural Networks,CNN)处理进行人工智能运算。例如，利用CNN模型做大量的信息识别和信息筛选，可实现情景智能的训练和识别。
处理器110中还可以设置存储器，用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中，处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据，可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取，减少了处理器110的等待时间，因而提高了系统的效率。
在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit，I2C)接口，集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound，I2S)接口，脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation，PCM)接口，通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter，UART)接口，移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface，MIPI)，通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output，GPIO)接口，用户标识模块(subscriber identity module，SIM)接口，和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口等。
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线，包括一根串行数据线(serial data line，SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line，SCL)。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K，充电器，闪光灯，摄像头193等。例如：处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K，使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信，实现电子设备100的触摸功能。
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合，实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信，将模拟信号抽样，量化和编码。在一些实施例中，音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中，音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线，用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中，UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如：处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信，实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194，摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface，CSI)，显示屏串行接口(display serial interface，DSI)等。在一些实施例中，处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信，实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信，实现电子设备100的显示功能。
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号，也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中，GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193，显示屏194，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口，I2S接口，UART接口，MIPI接口等。
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口，具体可以是Mini USB接口，Micro USB接口，USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电，也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机，通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备，例如AR设备等。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系，只是示意性说明，并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式，或多种接口连接方式的组合。
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中，充电器可以是无线充电器，也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时，还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142，充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入，为处理器110，内部存储器121，外部存储器，显示屏194，摄像头193，和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量，电池循环次数，电池健康状态(漏电，阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中，电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中，电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用，以提高天线的利用率。例如：可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中，天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器，开关，功率放大器，低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier，LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波，并对接收的电磁波进行滤波，放大等处理，传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大，经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个 器件中。
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中，调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后，被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A，受话器170B等)输出声音信号，或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110，与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括UWB，无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity，WiFi)网络)，蓝牙(bluetooth，BT)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)，调频(frequency modulation，FM)，近距离无线通信技术(near field communication，NFC)，红外技术(infrared，IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波，将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理，将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号，对其进行调频，放大，经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。
在一些实施例中，电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合，天线2和无线通信模块160耦合，使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications，GSM)，通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service，GPRS)，码分多址接入(code division multiple access，CDMA)，宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)，时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access，TD-SCDMA)，长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)，BT，GNSS，WLAN，NFC，FM，和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GLONASS)，北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system，BDS)，准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system，QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems，SBAS)。
其中，UWB无线通信是一种具备低耗电与高速传输的无线个人区域网络通讯技术。与常见的通信技术使用的连续载波方式不同，UWB采用脉冲信号来传送数据。UWB利用纳秒(ns)至皮秒(ps)级的非正弦波窄脉冲信号传输数据，而时间调变技术令其传输速率可以大大提高。因为使用的是极短脉冲，在高速通信的同时，UWB设备的发射功率却很小，仅仅只有目前的连续载波系统的几百分之一，因此耗电量相对较低。
UWB系统与传统的窄带系统相比，具有穿透力强、功耗低、抗多径效果好、安全性高、系统复杂度低、能提供精确定位精度等优点。UWB可以应用于需要高质量服务的无线通信应用，可以用在无线个人区域网络(WPAN)、家庭网路连接和短距离雷达等领域。UWB将成为解决企业、家庭、公共场所等高速因特网接入的需求与越来越拥挤的频率资源分配之间的矛盾的技术手段。
本申请实施例中，电子设备100通过一个UWB天线，可以实现距离和RRSI的测量。 电子设备100通过至少两个UWB天线可以实现AOA测量。下面介绍本申请实施例示例性提供的UWB天线的排列分布。
首先，先定义电子设备的参考坐标系。示例性，如图3B所示，电子设备的坐标系可以通过如下方式定义：X轴平行于电子设备屏幕的短边方向，从屏幕左边指向屏幕右边；Y轴平行于屏幕的长边方向，从屏幕底部指向屏幕顶部；Z轴垂直于X轴和Y轴构成的平面，即Z轴垂直于屏幕所在平面。当电子设备水平放置且屏幕朝上，Z轴与重力方向相反。
需要说明的，本申请实施例中提及的顶部、底部、左边、右边是相对的，是具体实现方式中的示例性地描述，不应对本申请实施例构成限定。可以理解，电子设备姿态改变时，本申请实施例中提及的电子设备的顶部、底部、左边和右边不会发生变化。
图3C至图3E示例性示出了具有UWB天线的电子设备100。在图3C中，电子终端100具有2个UWB天线，即天线A和天线B。其中，天线A和天线B的连接线平行于电子设备的X轴，2个UWB天线呈现一维排列。在图3D中，电子终端100具有3个天线，即天线A、天线B和天线C。其中，天线B和天线C的连接线平行于电子设备的Y轴，3个UWB天线呈现二维排列。在图3E中，电子设备具有4个UWB天线，即天线A、天线B、天线C和天线d。在一些实施例中，天线C和天线B的连接线平行于电子设备的Z轴，4个UWB天线呈现三维排列。图3C至图3E中，天线A和天线V的距离为d1，天线A和天线C的距离为d2，天线A和天线B的距离为d3。其中，d1、d2和d3均小于λ/2，λ为电磁波的波长。
需要说明的是，图3C至图3E示出的UWB天线的排列方式以及在电子设备上的分布位置，仅仅举例说明，并不是对本申请的限制。例如，同一排列方式下，除了图3C至图3E所示的UWB天线数量，电子设备100还可以有更多数量的UWB天线；同一排列方式下，除了图3C至图3E所示的UWB天线的分布位置，还可以有其他的分布位置。
本申请实施例中，UWB天线和前述天线1、天线2可以复用，也可以相互独立。此处不做具体限定。
在一些实施例中，电子设备处于待机状态时，电子设备100的UWB通信模块可以处于上电状态。
电子设备100通过GPU，显示屏194，以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器，连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算，用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU，其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。
显示屏194用于显示图像，视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display，LCD)，有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode，OLED)，有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的，AMOLED)，柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode，FLED)，Miniled，MicroLed，Micro-oLed，量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes，QLED)等。在一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194，N为大于1的正整数。
在本申请的一些实施例中，显示屏194中显示有系统当前输出的界面内容。例如，界面内容为即时通讯应用提供的界面。
电子设备100可以通过ISP，摄像头193，视频编解码器，GPU，显示屏194以及应用 处理器等实现拍摄功能。
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如，拍照时，打开快门，光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上，光信号转换为电信号，摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理，转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点，亮度，肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光，色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中，ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device，CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor，CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号，之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB，YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193，N为大于1的正整数。
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号，除了可以处理数字图像信号，还可以处理其他数字信号。例如，当电子设备100在频点选择时，数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样，电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频，例如：动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group，MPEG)1，MPEG2，MPEG3，MPEG4等。
NPU为神经网络(neural-network，NN)计算处理器，通过借鉴生物神经网络结构，例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式，对输入信息快速处理，还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用，例如：图像识别，人脸识别，语音识别，文本理解等。
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡，例如Micro SD卡，实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信，实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐，视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码，所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令，从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中，存储程序区可存储操作系统，至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能，图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据，电话本等)等。此外，内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件，闪存器件，通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage，UFS)等。
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放，录音等。
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出，也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中，或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。
扬声器170A，也称“喇叭”，用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐，或收听免提通话。
受话器170B，也称“听筒”，用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时，可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。
麦克风170C，也称“话筒”，“传声器”，用于采集声音(例如周围环境声音，包括人发出的声音、设备发出的声音等)，并将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时，用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声，将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。当电子设备的语音唤醒功能已开启的情况下，麦克风163可以实时采集周围环境声音，获取音频数据。其中，麦克风163采集声音的情况与所处的环境相关。例如，当周围环境较为嘈杂时，用户说出唤醒词，则麦克风163采集的声音包括周围环境噪声和用户发出唤醒词的声音。再例如，当周围环境较为安静时，用户说出唤醒词，则麦克风163采集的声音为用户发出唤醒词的声音。又例如，当周围环境较为嘈杂时，电子设备的语音唤醒功能已开启，但是用户并未说出唤醒词对电子设备进行唤醒，则麦克风163采集的声音仅为周围环境噪声。在另一些实施例中，电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C，除了采集声音信号，还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中，电子设备100还可以设置三个，四个或更多麦克风170C，实现采集声音信号，降噪，还可以识别声音来源，实现定向录音功能等。
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130，也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform，OMTP)标准接口，美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA，CTIA)标准接口。
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号，可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中，压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。在本申请一些可选的实施例中，压力传感器180A可用于捕获用户手指部位接触显示屏时生成的压力值，并将该压力值传输给处理器，以使得处理器识别用户通过哪个手指部位输入用户操作。
压力传感器180A的种类很多，如电阻式压力传感器，电感式压力传感器，电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A，电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194，电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中，作用于相同触摸位置，但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作，可以对应不同的操作指令。例如：当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行新建短消息的指令。在本申请一些可选的实施例中，压力传感器180A可将检测到的电容值传输给处理器，以使得处理器识别用户通过哪个手指部位(指关节或指肚等)输入用户操作。在本申请一些可选的实施例中，压力传感器180A还可根据检测到的信号计算触摸点的数量，并将计算值传输给处理器，以使得处理器识别用户通过单指或多指输入用户操作。
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中，可以通 过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(电子设备的X轴、Y轴和Z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的，当按下快门，陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度，根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离，让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动，实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航，体感游戏场景。
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中，电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度，辅助定位和导航。
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中，当电子设备100是翻盖机时，电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态，设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态，应用于横竖屏切换，计步器等应用。在本申请一些可选的实施例中，加速度传感器180E可用于捕获用户手指部位接触显示屏(或者用户手指敲击电子设备100的后壳后侧边框)时生成的加速度值，并将该加速度值传输给处理器，以使得处理器识别用户通过哪个手指部位输入用户操作。
本申请实施例中，电子设备100可以通过陀螺仪传感器和/或加速度传感器确定电子设备100的姿态变化，进而识别用户操作。例如，根据电子设备100的姿态变化识别当前用户操作为指向操作，指向操作可以为用户将电子设备100指向特定方向，并在预设时间内保持指向该特定方向。
距离传感器180F，用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中，拍摄场景，电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器，例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时，可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时，电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话，以便自动熄灭显示屏达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式，口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合，检测电子设备100是否在口袋里，以防误触。
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁，访问应用锁，指纹拍照，指纹接听来电等。
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中，电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度，执行温度处理策略。例如，当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值，电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能，以便降低功耗实施热保护。在 另一些实施例中，当温度低于另一阈值时，电子设备100对电池142加热，以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中，当温度低于又一阈值时，电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压，以避免低温导致的异常关机。
触摸传感器180K，也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194，由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏，也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作，该触摸触控操作是指用户手部、手肘、触控笔等接触显示屏194的操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器，以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中，触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面，与显示屏194所处的位置不同。
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中，骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏，接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中，骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中，结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号，解析出语音信号，实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息，实现心率检测功能。
按键190包括开机键，音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入，产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示，也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如，作用于不同应用(例如拍照，音频播放等)的触摸操作，可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作，马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如：时间提醒，接收信息，闹钟，游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。
指示器192可以是指示灯，可以用于指示充电状态，电量变化，也可以用于指示消息，未接来电，通知等。
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195，或从SIM卡接口195拔出，实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。
下面以电子设备201为例介绍本申请实施例提供的一种智能家居设备的结构。
图4示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的电子设备201的结构示意图。
如图4所示，电子设备201可以包括：处理器401，存储器402，无线通信处理模块403，天线404，电源开关405，有线LAN通信处理模块406，USB通信处理模块407，音频模块408。其中：
处理器401可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体实现中，处理器401可主要包括控制器、运算器和寄存器。其中，控制器主要负责指令译码，并为指令对应的操作发出控制信号。运算器主要负责保存指令执行过程中临时存放的寄存器操作数和中间操作结果等。具体实现中，处理器401的硬件架构可以是专用集成电路(ASIC)架构、MIPS架构、ARM架构或者NP架构等等。
在一些实施例中，处理器401可以用于解析无线通信模块403和/或有线LAN通信处 理模块406接收到的信号，如终端100广播的探测请求，等等。处理401可以用于根据解析结果进行相应的处理操作，如生成探测响应，等等。
在一些实施例中，处理器401还可用于生成无线通信模块403和/或有线LAN通信处理模块406向外发送的信号，如蓝牙广播信号、信标信号。
存储器402与处理器401耦合，用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体实现中，存储器402可包括高速随机存取的存储器，并且也可包括非易失性存储器，例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器402可以存储操作系统，例如uCOS，VxWorks、RTLinux等嵌入式操作系统。存储器402还可以存储通信程序，该通信程序可用于终端100，一个或多个服务器，或附件设备进行通信。
无线通信模块403可以包括UWB通信模块403A、蓝牙通信模块403B、WLAN通信模块403C、红外线通信模块403D中的一项或多项。其中，UWB通信模块403A可以集成到芯片(System on Chip，SOC)上，UWB通信模块403A在硬件上(或软件上)也可以与其他通信模块(例如，蓝牙通信模块403B)集成为一体。
在一些实施例中，UWB通信模块403A、蓝牙通信模块403B、WLAN通信模块403C、红外线通信模块403D中的一项或多项可以监听到其他设备(如电子设备100)发射的信号，如测量信号、扫描信号等等，并可以发送响应信号，如测量响应、扫描响应等，使得其他设备(如电子设备100)可以发现电子设备201，并通过UWB、蓝牙、WLAN或红外线中的一种或多种近距离无线通信技术与其他设备(如电子设备100)建立无线通信连接，来进行数据传输。
在另一些实施例中，UWB通信模块403A、蓝牙通信模块403B、WLAN通信模块403C、红外线通信模块403D中的一项或多项也可以发射信号，如广播UWB测量信号、信标信号，使得其他设备(如电子设备100)可以发现电子设备201，并通过UWB、蓝牙、WLAN或红外线中的一种或多种近距离无线通信技术与其他设备(如电子设备100)建立无线通信连接，来进行数据传输。
无线通信模块403还可以包括蜂窝移动通信模块(未示出)。蜂窝移动通信处理模块可以通过蜂窝移动通信技术与其他设备(如服务器)进行通信。
天线404可用于发射和接收电磁波信号。不同通信模块的天线可以复用，也可以相互独立，以提高天线的利用率。例如：可以将蓝牙通信模块403A的天线复用为WLAN通信模块403B的天线。例如，UWB通信模块403A要使用独立的UWB天线。
本申请实施中，为实现UWB通信，电子设备201至少具有一个UWB天线。
电源开关405可用于控制电源向电子设备201的供电。
有线LAN通信处理模块406可用于通过有线LAN和同一个LAN中的其他设备进行通信，还可用于通过有线LAN连接到WAN，可与WAN中的设备通信。
USB通信处理模块407可用于通过USB接口(未示出)与其他设备进行通信。
音频模块408可用于通过音频输出接口输出音频信号，这样可使得电子设备201支持音频播放。音频模块还可用于通过音频输入接口接收音频数据。电子设备201可以为电视机、音箱等媒体播放设备，也可以为空调、冰箱等非媒体播放设备。当电子设备201的语音唤醒功能已开启的情况下，音频模块408可以实时采集周围环境声音，获取音频数据。 音频模块还可以对音频模块接收的音频数据进行语音识别。
应该理解的是，图4所示电子设备201仅是一个范例，并且电子设备201可以具有比图4中所示的更多或更少的部件，可以组合两个或多个的部件，或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现。
下面结合的语音交互场景，具体介绍本申请实施例提供的一种设备控制方法。其中，该方法流程图中涉及的设备包括有电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203。在本申请实施例中，不限于电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203，该方法流程图中涉及的设备可以包括更多或更少的设备，图5A中只是示例性的解释本申请，不应构成限定。
请参照图5A，图5A示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种设备控制方法。所述方法中当电子设备201检测到用户的语音命令(例如预设唤醒词)时，发起UWB测量请求；电子设备100根据上述UWB测量请求确定电子设备100与电子设备201的距离。具体的，上述设备控制方法包括但不限于步骤S101至S107，其中：
S101、电子设备201实时采集环境声音。
用户意图通过语音控制电子设备201时，用户将电子设备100指向电子设备201，并说出语音命令。例如，用户想要唤醒电子设备201时，用户将电子设备100指向电子设备201并说出“小艺，小艺”，即上述语音命令包括预设唤醒词“小艺，小艺”。例如，用户想控制电子设备201播放音乐时，用户将电子设备100指向电子设备201并说出“播放音乐”。
示例性的，电子设备100的三维坐标系如图3B所示。在一些实施例，用户将电子设备100指向电子设备201，是指将电子设备100的Y轴指向电子设备201。
在一些实施例中，电子设备201可以在语音唤醒功能已开启的情况下，实时或周期性地采集语音信息。
S102、电子设备201根据上述环境声音检测到语音命令。
示例性的，电子设备201通过音频模块采集到用户发出的语音，例如该语音的具体内容为“小艺，小艺”。电子设备201将采集到的语音的具体内容“小艺，小艺”与预存唤醒词的语音关键词“小艺，小艺”对比，若语音的具体内容与预存唤醒词的语音关键词一致，则确定用户发出的语音为唤醒词“小艺，小艺”。
在一些实施例中，电子设备201根据上述环境声音检测到用户发出的语音命令。
示例性的，电子设备201通过音频模块408采集到用户发出的语音，例如该语音的具体内容为“小艺，小艺”。电子设备201将采集到的语音的具体内容“小艺，小艺”与预存唤醒词的语音关键词“小艺，小艺”对比，并将采集到的语音的语音特征与预设用户的语音特征对比，若语音的具体内容与预存唤醒词的语音关键词一致，且采集到的语音的语音特征与预设用户的语音特征的匹配度超过一定阈值，则确定是预设用户发出唤醒词“小艺，小艺”。
S103、电子设备201广播UWB测量请求，电子设备100接收上述UWB测量请求，该UWB测量请求携带电子设备201的身份标识(Identity document，ID)ID1。
电子设备201检测到用户的语音命令后，为了确定上述语音命令要控制的目标设备，电子设备201发起方位参数的测量。在一些实施例中，上述方位参数可以包括电子设备201 与电子设备100间的距离、电子设备100上电子设备201的信号AOA，还可以包括RRSI。其中，RRSI可以用于确定电子设备201与电子设备100间是否有遮挡。
具体的，电子设备201广播第一测量请求，并记录第一测量请求发送时刻为T1，第一测量请求携带ID1，第一测量请求用于测量电子设备201的方位参数。电子设备100在T2时刻接收到电子设备201发送的第一测量请求，并记录第一测量请求的接收时刻为T2。
S104、电子设备100根据上述UWB测量请求确定电子设备201的方位参数。
在一些实施例中，UWB测量请求携带UWB测量请求的发送时刻，电子设备100根据UWB测量请求根据可以确定UWB测量请求的发送时刻和接收时刻可以确定电子设备201的距离，根据UWB测量请求还可以确定UWB测量请求信号AOA以及RRSI。
S105、电子设备100根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备为电子设备201。
在一些实施例中，方位参数包括距离、信号AOA以及RRSI，电子设备100根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数，确定与电子设备100无遮挡的设备中，AOA最接近预设角度或距离最近的设备为电子设备201。
在一些实施例中，方位参数包括距离和信号AOA，电子设备100根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数，确定AOA最接近预设角度或距离最近的设备为电子设备201。
在一些实施例中，方位参数包括信号AOA，电子设备100根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的信号AOA，确定AOA最接近预设角度的设备为电子设备201。
S106、电子设备100向电子设备201发送第一指示信息。
S107、响应于第一指示信息和上述语音命令，电子设备201发出响应信息。
根据电子设备201的类型，上述响应信息能以语音、文字、图像、动画等形式中的一或多种形式展现。例如，电子设备201为包括显示屏的显示设备(例如电视机)，上述响应信息可以展现为文字信息“我在”。例如，电子设备201为包括扬声器的音频设备(例如音箱机)，上述响应信息可以展现为语音信息“我在”。示例性的，如图1A所示，音箱发出语音“我在”。
在一些实施例中，参考图5B，电子设备201发起UWB测量请求，电子设备100计算电子设备201的方位参数，电子设备100可以采用测距算法1确定电子设备201的距离。参考图5C，步骤S104可具体包括S104A至S104D，其中：
S104A、电子设备100在T3时刻向电子设备201发送第一测量响应，第一测量响应中携带ID1和电子设备100的身份标识ID2。
具体的，电子设备100在T3时刻向电子设备201发送第一测量响应，并记录第一测量响应的发送时刻为T3。电子设备201在T4时刻接收第一测量响应，并记录第一测量请求的接收时刻为T4。其中，第一测量响应中携带ID1和ID2。
S104B、电子设备100在T5时刻向电子设备201发送第二测量请求，第二测量请求中携带ID1和ID2。
具体的，电子设备100在T5时刻向电子设备201发送第二测量请求，并记录第二测量 请求的发送时刻为T5。电子设备201在T6时刻接收第二测量请求，并记录第二测量请求的接收时刻为T6。其中，第二测量请求中携带ID1和ID2。
S104C、电子设备201在T7时刻向电子设备100发送第二测量响应，第二测量请求中携带T1、T4、T6、T7、ID1和ID2。
具体的，电子设备201在T7时刻向电子设备100发送第二测量响应，并记录第二测量响应的发送时刻为T7。电子设备100在T8接收第二测量请求，并记录第二测量请求的接收时刻为T8。其中，第二测量请求中携带T1、T4、T6、T7、ID1和ID2。
S104D、根据T1、T2、T3、T4、T5、T6、T7和T8确定电子设备201的距离，根据第一测量请求和/或第二测量响应确定电子设备201的信号AOA以及RRSI。
具体的，步骤S104D可包括：
(1)电子设备100根据T1、T2、T3、T4、T5、T6、T7和T8确定电子设备201的距离。
具体的，电子设备100根据T1、T2、T3、T4、T5、T6、T7和T8，确定在电子设备100与电子设备201间的平均单向飞行时间T。再根据单向飞行时间T与电磁波传播速度C的乘积，便可确定与电子设备201的距离D为C*T。
参考图5B，第一测量请求的发送时刻T1和第一测量响应的接收时刻T4的时间差等于Tround1，第一测量请求的接收时刻T2和第一测量响应的发送时刻T3的时间差等于Trelay1，第二测量请求的发送时刻T5和第二测量响应的接收时刻T8的时间差等于Tround2，第二测量请求的接收时刻T6和第二测量响应的发送时刻T7的时间差等于Trelay2。本申请实施例中，单向飞行时间T可以表示如下：
Figure PCTCN2021105455-appb-000003
(2)电子设备100根据第一测量请求和/或第二测量响应确定电子设备201的信号AOA。
本申请实施例中，电子设备100可以根据第一测量请求信号和/或第二测量响应到达不同位置的UWB天线的相位差来计算信号的接收方向，从而确定电子设备201相对于电子设备100的朝向。
示例性的，如图5D所示，电子设备100接收电子设备201发送的无线信号，该信号的在电子设备100的信号AOA(即相对于接收天线1和接收天线2的连接线，上述无线信号的入射角θ)可以根据该信号在电子设备100的接收天线1和接收天线2上的相位差
Figure PCTCN2021105455-appb-000004
确定。其中，
Figure PCTCN2021105455-appb-000005
可表示如下，
Figure PCTCN2021105455-appb-000006
其中，λ为波长，φ(θ)为天线硬件相位差。通过上式可以确定入射角θ，即电子设备201的信号AOA。
参考图3D和图3E，在一些实施例中，用户将电子设备100指向电子设备201，是指将电子设备100的Y轴指向电子设备201。电子设备100根据天线A、天线B、天线C中的至少2个天线的接收信号相位差，确定电子设备100接收到的电子设备201发送的信号 AOA。
在一些实施例中，电子设备100根据天线A和天线C的相位差确定电子设备201发送的信号AOA(即相对于Y轴的入射角)。天线A和天线C的连线平行于Y轴。该实现方式下，电子设备201的信号AOA越接近0度，表明电子设备100越指向电子设备201。在另一些实施例中，电子设备100根据天线A和天线B的相位差确定电子设备201发送的信号AOA(即相对于X轴的入射角)。天线A和天线B的连线平行于X轴。该实现方式下，电子设备201的信号AOA越接近90度，表明电子设备100越指向电子设备201。在另一些实施例中，电子设备100根据天线B和天线C的相位差确定电子设备201发送的信号AOA(即相对于Z轴的入射角)。天线B和天线C的连线平行于Z轴。该实现方式下，电子设备201的信号AOA越接近90度，表明电子设备100越指向电子设备201。
可以理解，电子设备100可以在步骤S104A根据第一测量请求确定电子设备201的信号AOA，也可以在步骤S104C根据第二测量响应确定电子设备201的信号AOA，也可以在步骤S104C根据第一测量请求和第二测量响应对应的信号AOA的平均值确定电子设备201的信号AOA。此处不做具体限定。
(3)电子设备100确定与电子设备201发送信号的RRSI。
在一些实施例中，电子设备100根据第一测量请求和第二测量响应的RRSI平均值确定电子设备201发送信号的RRSI。在一些实施例中，电子设备100根据第一测量请求或第二测量响应的RRSI确定电子设备201发送信号的RRSI。
可以理解，电子设备100也可以在步骤S104A根据第一测量请求的RRSI确定电子设备201发送信号的RRSI，
本申请实施例中，可以根据电子设备201发送信号的RRSI确定电子设备100与电子设备201间是否有遮挡物。
可以理解，在有遮挡的非视距(Non line-of-sight，NLOS)传播条件下，信号衰减较大，在无遮挡的视距(line-of-sight，LOS)传播条件下，信号衰减较小。同一传播条件下，距离越远，信号衰减较大。本申请实施例中，根据第一测量请求信号和/第二测量响应信号的RRSI，以及电子设备201的距离，可以确定电子设备100与电子设备201间是否有遮挡物。
在一些实施例中，根据电子设备100与电子设备201的距离，可以确定电子设备100接收到的电子设备201发送信号的预设RRSI。当接收到的电子设备201发送信号的RRSI小于预设RRSI，则确定电子设备100与电子设备201间有遮挡物，否则无遮挡物。
在一些实施例中，电子设备201的方位参数可以包括电子设备201的距离、信号AOA以及第一标识。其中，电子设备201的第一标识用于表征电子设备100与电子设备201间是否有遮挡。例如，第一标识等于1表示有遮挡，第一标识等于0表示无遮挡。
在另一些实施例中，参考图5E，电子设备201发起UWB测量请求，电子设备100计算电子设备201的方位参数，电子设备100还可以采用测距算法2确定电子设备201的距离。参考图5F，步骤S104还可具体包括S104E至S104G。
其中，步骤S104G中根据T1、T2、T3、T4、T9和T10确定电子设备201的距离，具体包括：电子设备100根据T1、T2、T3、T4、T9和T10，确定在电子设备100与电子设备201间的平均单向飞行时间T。再根据单向飞行时间T与电磁波传播速度C的乘积，便 可确定与电子设备201的距离D为C*T。
参考图5E，第一测量请求的发送时刻T1和第一测量响应的接收时刻T4的时间差等于Tround1，第一测量请求的接收时刻T2和第一测量响应的发送时刻T3的时间差等于Trelay1，第一测量响应的发送时刻T3和第三测量响应的接收时刻T10的时间差等于Tround2，第一测量响应的接收时刻T6和第三测量响应的发送时刻T9的时间差等于Trelay2，单向飞行时间T可以如公式1所示。
本申请实施例中，电子设备100可以根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的距离、信号AOA、RRSI中的一或多项，确定目标设备为电子设备201。
参考图5G，步骤S105中电子设备100根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备为电子设备201，具体可包括：
S1、根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数中的RRSI(或第一标识)，判断是否存在与电子设备100无遮挡的设备，若是则执行步骤S2，若否则执行步骤S4。
在一些实施例中，根据电子设备201的距离，可以确定电子设备100接收到的电子设备201发送信号的预设RRSI。当电子设备201发送信号的RRSI小于预设RRSI，则确定电子设备100与电子设备201间有遮挡，否则无遮挡。
在一些实施例中，当电子设备201的第一标识等于第一值(例如1)，则电子设备201与电子设备100间无遮挡；当电子设备201的第一标识等于第二值(例如0)，则电子设备201与电子设备100间有遮挡。
S2、电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203中无遮挡的设备数量是否等于1，若是则执行步骤S3，若否则执行步骤S4。
S3、确定上述无遮挡的电子设备为电子设备201。
可以理解，当电子设备100附近只有一个无遮挡设备时，确定该无遮挡设备为用户意图唤醒的目标设备。
S4、确定信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个电子设备。
在一些实施例中，步骤S1判断电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203中不存在与电子设备100无遮挡的设备，则S4中电子设备100确定电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203中信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个电子设备。
在一些实施例中，步骤S2判断电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203中与电子设备100无遮挡的设备数量大于1，则S4中电子设备100确定电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203中的无遮挡设备中信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个电子设备。
在一些实施例中，电子设备100根据天线A和天线C的相位差确定电子设备201的信号AOA，天线A和天线C的连线平行于Y轴。该实现方式下，上述预设角度等于0度。在另一些实施例中，电子设备100根据天线A和天线B的相位差确定电子设备201发送的信号AOA，天线A和天线B的连线平行于X轴。该实现方式下，上述预设角度等于90度。在另一些实施例中，电子设备100根据天线B和天线C的相位差确定电子设备201发送的信号AOA，天线B和天线C的连线平行于Z轴。该实现方式下，上述预设角度等于90度。
可以理解，电子设备201的信号AOA确定方式不同，上述预设角度可以不同。本申请 实施例中，上述预设角度还可以为其他值，此处不做具体限定。
S5、上述两个电子设备的信号AOA差值是否大于第一阈值，若是则执行步骤S6，若否则执行步骤S7。
例如，第一阈值为10度。
S6、确定上述两个电子设备中信号AOA更接近预设角度的电子设备为电子设备201。
S7、确定上述两个电子设备中距离更小的电子设备为电子设备201。
可以理解，上述实施例中，电子设备100确定无遮挡设备(或所有设备中)中最接近电子设备100指向方向且距离最近的电子设备为用户意图唤醒的设备。
在本申请的另一些实施例中，方向参数包括距离、信号AOA。步骤S105具体可以仅包括S4至S7。即电子设备100根据附近的设备的方位参数，确定附近的设备中最接近预设角度或距离最近的设备为电子设备201。
需要说明的是，在一些实施例中，用户可以使用一或多个电子设备(例如，智能手机、智能手环、平板)控制附近的智能家居设备。智能家居设备检测到用户的语音命令(例如预设唤醒词)后，广播UWB测量请求，接收到上述UWB测量请求的用户的电子设备(例如，如图5C和图5F所示的电子设备100和电子设备500)均会向电子设备201发送测量响应，进而也可以分别确定相对于电子设备100和电子设备500，电子设备201的方位参数。
在本申请的一些实施例中，提供了另一种根据多个电子设备的方位参数确定目标设备的方法，具体实现方式可以参考图5H。
如图5H所示，步骤S2之后还可以包括S8。
S8、该无遮挡的附近设备的信号AOA与预设角度的差值是否小于预设差值，若是则执行步骤S3，若否则执行S9。
例如，预设差值为20度。
S9、确定电子设备100没有目标设备。
如图5H所示，步骤S4之后还可以包括S10。
S10、信号AOA最接近预设角度的电子设备的信号AOA与预设角度差值是否小于预设差值，若是，则执行S5，若否则执行S9。
这样，在存在多个可以控制智能家居设备的用户的电子设备(例如电子设备100和电子设备500)的情况下，所提方法能够降低目标设备的误判可能性。
请参照图6A，图6A示出了本申请实施例中提供的另一种设备控制方法。该方法流程图中涉及的设备包括有电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203。所提方法中当电子设备201检测到用户的语音命令(例如预设唤醒词)时，发起UWB测量请求；且电子设备201可以根据电子设备100反馈的测量响应确定与电子设备100间的距离。上述设备控制方法包括但不限于步骤S201至S209，其中：
S201、电子设备201实时采集环境声音。
S202、电子设备201根据上述环境声音检测到语音命令。
具体的，可参考步骤S102的相关实施例。此处不再赘述。
S203、电子设备201广播UWB测量请求，电子设备100接收上述UWB测量请求。
具体的，电子设备201在T1时刻广播第一测量请求，第一测量请求携带ID1，第一测量请求用于测量电子设备201的方位参数。同时，电子设备201记录第一测量请求发送时刻为T1。电子设备100在T2时刻接收到电子设备201发送的第一测量请求，并记录第一测量请求的接收时刻为T2。
S204、电子设备100向电子设备201发送测量响应。
S205、电子设备201根据电子设备100发送的测量响应确定电子设备201的方位参数。
S206、电子设备201向电子设备301发送电子设备201的方位参数。
S207、电子设备301根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备为电子设备201。
具体的，电子设备301如何根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备，可参考图5G和图5H的相关实施例。此处不再赘述。
S208、电子设备301向电子设备201发送第一指示信息。
S209、响应于第一指示信息和上述语音指令，电子设备201发出响应信息。
在一些实施例中，参考图6B，电子设备201发起UWB测量请求，电子设备201采用测距算法3确定电子设备201的距离。参考图6C，步骤S204进一步可以包括步骤S204A和步骤S204B。
S204A、电子设备100根据第一测量请求在不同天线上的相位差确定电子设备201的信号AOA为AOA1。
具体的，电子设备100如何确定AOA1可以参考步骤S104D的相关实施例，此处不再赘述。
S204B、电子设备100在T3时刻向电子设备201发送第一测量响应，第一测量请求携带AOA1、T2、T3、ID1和ID2。电子设备201在T4时刻接收到电子设备100发送的第一测量响应，并记录第一测量响应的接收时刻为T4。
可以理解，图6B所示实施例中，由电子设备100确定电子设备201的信号AOA。在一些实施例中，智能家具设备可以根据电子设备100发送的信号分辨电子设备100的位置所在方向，但不能分辨电子设备100的指向方向。
步骤S205具体包括：针对电子设备100，电子设备201确定电子设备201的信号AOA为AOA1，电子设备201根据T1、T2、T3和T4确定电子设备201的距离，电子设备201确定第一测量响应的RRSI。
具体的，电子设备201如何根据第一测量响应的RRSI确定电子设备201是否有遮挡，可以参考步骤S104D，此处不再赘述。电子设备201根据T1、T2、T3和T4确定信号在电子设备100与电子设备201间的平均单向飞行时间T。再根据单向飞行时间T与电磁波传播速度C的乘积，便可确定与电子设备201的距离D＝C*T。
参考图6B，第一测量请求的发送时刻T1和第一测量响应的接收时刻T4的时间差等于Tround1，第一测量请求的接收时刻T2和第一测量响应的发送时刻T3的时间差等于Trelay1，单向飞行时间T可以表示如下：
Figure PCTCN2021105455-appb-000007
在一些实施例中，参考图6C和图6D，电子设备201可以多次发起测量请求，根据多次测量请求和多测测量响应的收发时间，利用图6D所示的测距算法4获取单向飞行时间平均值，减小距离测量误差。
下面结合语音交互场景，介绍本申请中提供的另一种设备控制方法。该方法流程图中涉及的设备包括有电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203。具体的，参考图6E，上述设备控制方法包括但不限于步骤S211至S216，其中：
S211、电子设备201实时采集环境声音。
S212、电子设备201根据上述环境声音检测到语音命令时，确定上述语音命令的分贝信息。
S213、电子设备201向电子设备301发送电子设备201确定的分贝信息。
其中，电子设备301可以是电子设备100，也可以是附近设备中的一个(例如电子设备202)，还可以是路由器、网关等第三方设备。此处不做具体限定。
S214、电子设备301根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的分贝信息，确定分贝信息最大的电子设备201为目标设备。
S215、电子设备301向电子设备201发送第一指示信息。
S216、响应于第一指示信息和上述语音命令，电子设备201发出响应信息。
在一些实施例中，当电子设备201接收并检测到语音命令时，确定上述语音命令的能量信息，并向电子设备301发送能量信息。上述电子设备301还可以根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的接收到的语音命令的能量信息，确定能量信息最大的电子设备为用户意图唤醒的目标设备。
此外，结合连接配对场景，本申请实施例还提供了另一种设备控制方法，所提方法能够通过简洁操作实现电子设备100与目标设备的配对连接。
示例性的，如图7A所示，用户附近有多个智能家居设备，例如音箱201、冰箱202、电视机203、空调204等。用户意图将电子设备100和上述多个智能家居设备中的一个设备进行配对连接时，用户将电子设备100指向目标设备(例如，音箱201)，电子设备100响应于检测到的第一用户操作(例如，用户单击电子设备100的后壳)，电子设备100发起针对上述多个智能家居设备的方位参数(例如距离、信号AOA、RRSI等)的测量。根据上述多个智能家居设备的方位参数可以确定用户意图配对连接的目标设备为音箱201；电子设备100可以获取音箱201的连接参数，并根据上述连接参数与音箱201建立连接。
如图7A所示，电子设备100可以为华为手机，电子设备100与音箱201成功建立连接后，音箱201可以发出语音信息“与华为手机建立连接”。示例性的，如图7B所示，电子设备100与音箱201成功建立连接后，电子设备100也可以显示提示信息501，提示信息501用于提示用户电子设备100与音箱201建立了连接。提示性信息501的具体内容可以为“与音箱建立连接”。
在一些实施例中，图7B示例性所示的用户界面10可以为主界面(Home screen)。用户界面10可以包括状态栏，导航栏，日历指示符，天气指示符。还可以包括多个应用程序图标，例如互传的图标、图库的图标、音乐的图标、智能家居的图标等等。
本申请实施例中，电子设备100与音箱201建立连接后，用户可以通过电子设备100可以控制音箱201。示例性的，如图7C所示，电子设备100可以接收用户作用于提示信息501的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的上述输入操作，电子设备100显示音箱201的控制界面11。
用户界面11可包括：应用程序标题栏601，连接卡片602，音乐卡片603，附近设备卡片604。其中：
连接卡片602可以包括指示信息602A和连接方式602B。其中，指示信息602A用于表征音箱201当前是在线状态还是离线状态。在线状态指音箱201当前已连接到互联网，离线状态指音箱201当前未连接到互联网。连接方式602B用于指示音箱201与电子设备100当前的连接方式，当音箱201与电子设备100当前的连接方式为蓝牙时，连接方式602B可以展现于蓝牙的图标。当音箱201与电子设备100当前的连接方式为WiFi时，连接方式602B可以展现于WiFi的图标。
音乐卡片603可以包括音乐名称603A，暂停控件603B，上一个控件603C，下一个控件603D，进度条603E，音量603F，更多控件603H。
暂停控件603B可接收用户的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的用户操作，音箱201暂停播放音乐。
上一个控件603C可接收用户的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的用户操作，音箱201可以播放音乐列表中当前播放歌曲的上一首歌曲。
下一个控件603D可接收用户的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的用户操作，音箱201可以播放音乐列表中当前播放歌曲的下一首歌曲。
进度条603E的可以指示当前歌曲的总时长(例如，04:42)和已播放时长(例如，00:42)。
音量603F可接收用户的输入操作(例如，滑动操作)，响应于检测到的用户操作，音箱201调整音箱201的播放音量。
更多控件603H可接收用户的输入操作(例如，滑动操作)，响应于检测到的用户操作，电子设备100可以显示音乐卡片的更多功能选项，例如，分享、删除、下载等。
附近设备卡片604可以包括一或多个附近设备的图标，例如空调图标604A、客厅电视图标604B、冰箱图标604C。附近设备卡片604中多个附近设备的图标的排列顺序可以是基于距离或使用频率等因素。附近设备卡片604可以接收用户的输入操作(例如长按操作)，响应于检测到的用户操作，电子设备100可以显示更多附近设备的图标。空调图标604A、客厅电视图标604B或冰箱图标604C可以接收用户的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的用户操作，电子设备100可以显示该设备对应的控制界面。
除了7C所示的显示音箱201的控制界面11的方式，还可以有其他方式，此处不作具体限定。
示例性的，如图7D所示，用户界面10包括智能家居图标502。电子设备100可接收用户作用于智能家居图标502的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于上述输入操作，电子设备100显示智能家居的用户界面12。
用户界面12可包括：应用程序标题栏701，区域选择栏702，家居设备显示栏703，增加控件704，功能栏705。其中：
区域选择栏702可包括：全部控件702A，客厅控件702B，主卧控件702C。其中，全部控件702A、客厅控件702B和主卧控件702C中的任一控件可接收用户的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的输入操作，电子设备100可在家居设备显示栏703显示该控件对应区域的家居设备。
如图7D所示，家居设备显示栏703显示客厅中的多个家居设备，多个家居设备包括：音箱703A，客厅电视703B、客厅的空调703C，冰箱703D，客厅的台灯703E。家居设备显示栏703显示的多个家居设备中的任一家居设备可接收用户的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的输入操作，电子设备100显示该家居设备的控制界面。
示例性的，如图7E所示，电子设备100接收用户作用于音箱703A的用户操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的上述输入操作，电子设备100显示音箱的控制界面11。
增加控件704可接收用户的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的输入操作，电子设备100显示用于增添家居设备的界面。
功能栏705可包括智能家居图标705A、商城图标705B、酷玩图标705C、用户中心图标705D，接收用户的输入操作(例如，单击操作)，响应于检测到的输入操作，电子设备100显示用于该图标对应的界面。
示例性的，如图7F所示，用户意图将电子设备100和电视机203进行配对连接时，用户将电子设备100指向电视机203，电子设备100响应于检测到用户的第一用户操作(例如，用户单击电子设备100的后壳)，电子设备100测量与上述多个智能家居设备的方位参数，并根据上述多个智能家居设备的方位参数，确定用户意图配对连接的目标设备为电视机203；电子设备100获取电视机203的连接参数，并根据上述连接参数与电视机203建立连接。建立连接后，电视机203的显示屏上可以显示提示信息(例如文字信息“与华为手机建立连接”)。此外，电子设备100和电视机203建立连接后，可以通过电子设备100显示的电视机203的控制界面控制电视机203。示例性的，电视机203的控制界面13如图7G所示。
下面结合配对连接场景，介绍本申请中提供的另一种设备控制方法。其中，该方法流程图中涉及的设备包括有电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203。该方法流程图中涉及的设备可以包括更多或更少的设备，图8A中只是示例性的解释本申请，不应构成限定。
请参照图8A，图8A示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种设备控制方法。所提方法中电子设备100检测到第一用户操作时，发起UWB测量请求。并根据电子设备201的测量响应，确定电子设备100与电子设备201间的距离。具体的，上述设备控制方法包括但不限于步骤S301至S307，其中：
S301、电子设备100检测到第一用户操作。
在一些实施例中，电子设备100通过加速度传感器和/或陀螺仪传感器检测到电子设备100的姿态变化，并根据电子设备100的姿态变化确定电子设备100的指向操作，第一用户操作即为上述指向操作。
在一些实施例中，用户将电子设备100指向附近设备(例如电子设备201)，并实施第一用户操作，电子100通过加速度传感器和/或陀螺仪传感器检测到上述第一用户操作。第 一用户操作可以为用户敲击电子设备100的后壳，或者用户敲击电子设备100的侧边框。
不限于上述第一用户操作，用户还可以通过语音指令实施第一用户操作，例如，语音指令的具体内容可以为“配对连接”；用户还可以通过电子设备100的按键实施第一用户操作，此处不做具体限定。
S302、响应于第一用户操作，电子设备100广播UWB测量请求，电子设备201接收上述UWB测量请求。
在一些实施例中，参考图8B，电子设备100发起UWB测量请求，电子设备100采用测距算法3确定电子设备201的距离。参考图8C，步骤S302具体可以包括：电子设备100在T11时刻广播第四测量请求，并记录第四测量请求发送时刻为T11，第四测量请求携带ID2。电子设备201在T12时刻接收到电子设备100发送的第四测量请求，并记录第四测量请求的接收时刻为T12。
S303、电子设备201向电子设备100发送测量响应。
具体的，参考图8C，电子设备201在T13时刻向电子设备201发送第四测量响应，第一测量请求携带T12、T13、ID1和ID2。电子设备201在T4时刻接收到电子设备100发送的第四测量响应，并记录第四测量响应的接收时刻为T14时刻。
S304、电子设备100根据电子设备201发送的测量响应确定电子设备201的方位参数。
具体的，电子设备201的方位参数可以包括电子设备201与电子设备100间的距离、电子设备201的信号AOA、电子设备201发送信号的RRSI中的一或多项。电子设备100根据T11、T12、T13、T14和公式(3)确定信号单向飞行时间，并根据单向飞行时间确定电子设备201的距离；电子设备100根据第四测量请求确定电子设备201的信号AOA以及RRSI。具体的，电子设备100如何确定电子设备201的方位参数，可参考步骤S104G的相关实施例。此处不再赘述。
S305、电子设备100根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备为电子设备201。
具体的，电子设备100如何根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备，可参考图5G的相关实施例。此处不再赘述。
S306、电子设备100向电子设备201发送连接请求，电子设备201接收电子设备100发送的连接请求。
S307、电子设备201向电子设备100发送第一能力信息和相应的连接参数，上述第一能力信息用于表征电子设备201能支持的通信模式。
在一些实施例中，当上述第一能力信息表征WiFi通信模式时，相应的连接参数可以包括：设备ID，配对秘钥等参数。电子设备100可以使用IEE802.11标准的连接过程，基于上述连接参数与电子设备201建立WiFi连接；
在一些实施例中，当上述第一能力信息表征蓝牙通信模式时，相应的连接参数可以包括：秘钥，加密方式，服务集标识(Service Set Identifier，SSID)等参数。电子设备100可以使用IEE802.15.1标准的连接过程，基于上述连接参数与电子设备201建立蓝牙连接。
在一些实施例中，当上述第一能力信息表征WiFi通信模式和蓝牙通信模式时，电子设备100优先可以使用IEE802.11标准的连接过程，基于上述连接参数与电子设备201建立 WiFi连接。
在一些实施例中，第四测量请求还可以携带第二能力信息，第二能力信息用于表征电子设备100所能支持的所有通信模式，例如蓝牙、WiFi等。第四测量响应还可以携带第一能力信息和相应的连接参数。其中，第二能力信息包括第一能力信息，第二能力信息是电子设备201根据第二能力信息确定的。这样步骤S305之后，电子设备100可以直接根据第四测量响应中的第一能力信息和相应的连接参数，与电子设备201建立连接，无需再次发送连接请求。
在一些实施例中，电子设备100也可以多次发起测量请求，根据多次测量请求和多测测量响应的收发时间，利用测距算法4获取单向飞行时间平均值，减小距离测量误差。
请参照图8D，图8D示出了本申请实施例中提供的另一种设备控制方法。该方法流程图中涉及的设备包括有电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203。所提方法中当电子设备100检测到第一用户操作时，发起UWB测量请求；且由电子设备201根据UWB测量请求确定与电子设备100间的距离。具体的，上述设备控制方法包括但不限于步骤S401至S408，其中：
S401、电子设备100检测到第一用户操作。
S402、响应与上述第一用户操作，电子设备100广播UWB测量请求。
在一些实施例中，步骤402具体可以包括：响应与上述第一用户操作，电子设备100在T11时刻广播第四测量请求，并记录第四测量请求发送时刻为T11，第四测量请求携带ID2。电子设备201在T12时刻接收到电子设备100发送的第四测量请求，并记录第四测量请求的接收时刻为T12。
S403、电子设备201根据上述UWB测量请求确定电子设备201的方位参数。
S404、电子设备201向电子设备301发送电子设备201的方位参数。
S405、电子设备301根电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备为电子设备201。
具体的，电子设备301如何根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备，可参考图5G的相关实施例。此处不再赘述。
S406、电子设备301向电子设备100发送第二指示信息。
S407、响应于第二指示信息，电子设备100向电子设备201发送连接请求。
S408、电子设备201向电子设备100发送第一能力信息和相应的连接参数。
在一些实施例中，参考图8E，电子设备100发起UEB测量请求，电子设备201利用双边双向算法2计算电子设备100与电子设备201间的距离。具体的，参考图8F，步骤S403进一步可以包括S403A至S403D。其中：
S403A、电子设备201在T13时刻向电子设备100发送第四测量响应，第四测量响应携带ID1和ID2。
具体的，电子设备201在T13时刻向电子设备100发送第四测量响应，并记录第四测量响应的发送时刻为T13，其中，第四测量响应携带ID1和ID2。电子设备100在T14时刻接收到电子设备201发送的第四测量响应，并记录第四测量响应的接收时刻为T14。
S403B、电子设备100根据第四测量响应在不同天线上的相位差确定电子设备201的 信号AOA为AOA3。
具体的，如何根据第四测量响应在不同天线上的相位差确定AOA3可以参考步骤S104G的相关实施例，此处不再赘述。
S403C、电子设备100向电子设备201发送第五测量响应，第五测量响应携带AOA3、T11、T14、T15、ID1和ID2。
S403D、确定电子设备201的信号AOA为AOA3，根据T11、T12、T13、T14、T15和T16确定电子设备201的距离，根据第四测量请求和/或第五测量响应确定电子设备201的RRSI。
具体的，电子设备根据T11、T12、T13、T14、T15、T16和公式(1)确定信号的单向飞行时间，并根据单向飞行时间确定电子设备201的距离。
同理，在一些实施例中，第四测量请求还可以携带第一能力信息，第一能力信息用于表征电子设备100所能支持的一或多种通信模式，例如蓝牙、WiFi等。第四测量响应还可以携带第二能力信息和连接参数，第二能力信息用于表征电子设备201选择的且有能力支持的通信模式。这样步骤S406之后，电子设备100可以直接根据第四测量响应中的连接参数与电子设备201建立连接，无需再次发送连接请求。
在另一些实施例中，电子设备100发起UWB测量请求，电子设备201还可以采用测距算法1确定电子设备201的距离。测距算法1可以参考图5B实施例，此处不再赘述。
示例性的，图9A示出了本申请实施例中提供的另一种设备控制方法。该方法流程图中涉及的设备包括有电子设备100、电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203。所提方法中电子设备201周期性的广播UWB测量请求；当电子设备100检测到第一用户操作时，电子设备100根据电子设备201广播的UWB测量请求，确定电子设备201的方位参数。具体的，上述设备控制方法包括但不限于步骤S501至S505，其中：
S501、电子设备201定时广播UWB测量请求。
S502、电子设备100响应于检测到的第一用户操作，根据上述UWB测量请求确定电子设备201的方位参数。
具体的，电子设备100响应于检测到的第一用户操作，根据电子设备201广播的第六测量请求确定电子设备201的方位参数，第六测量请求携带ID1和和第六测量请求的发送时刻T17。电子设备100在T18时刻接收到电子设备100发送的第四测量请求，并记录第四测量请求的接收时刻为T18。
S503、电子设备100根据电子设备201、电子设备202和电子设备203的方位参数确定目标设备为电子设备201。
S504、电子设备100向电子设备201发送连接请求。
S505、电子设备201向电子设备100发送第一能力信息和相应的连接参数。
在一些实施例中，参考图9B，电子设备201发起UWB测量请求，电子设备100利用测距算法2计算电子设备100与电子设备201间的距离。具体的，参考图9C，步骤S502进一步可以包括S502A至S502C。其中：
S502A、电子设备100检测到的第一用户操作，在T19时刻向电子设备201发送第六测量响应，并记录第六测量响应的发送时刻为T19，第六测量响应携带ID1和ID2。电子 设备201在T20时刻接收电子设备100发送的第六测量响应，并记录第六测量响应的接收时刻为T20。
S502B、电子设备100在T21时刻向电子设备201发送第七测量响应，第七测量响应携带T20、T21、ID1和ID2。电子设备201在T22时刻接收电子设备100发送的第七测量响应，并记录第七测量响应的接收时刻为T22。
S502C、电子设备100根据T17、T18、T19、T20、T21和T22确定电子设备201的距离，根据第六测量请求和/或第七测量响应确定电子设备201的信号AOA以及RRSI。
具体的，电子设备100根据T17、T18、T19、T20、T21、T22和公式(1)确定信号的单向飞行时间，进而根据单向飞行时间确定电子设备201的距离。如何根据第六测量请求和/或第七测量响应确定电子设备201的信号AOA以及RRSI，可参考步骤S104G的相关实施例，此处不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，第六测量请求还可以携带第三能力信息，第三能力信息用于表征电子设备201所能支持的一或多种通信模式，例如蓝牙、WiFi等。第六测量响应还可以携带第四能力信息，第四能力信息用于表征电子设备100根据第三能力信息选择的且能支持的一种通信模式。第七测量响应还可以携带电子设备201的第四能力信息对应的连接参数。这样步骤S503之后，电子设备100可以直接根据第七测量响应中的连接参数直接与电子设备201建立连接，无需再次发送连接请求。
在一些实施例中，参考图9D，电子设备201发起UWB测量请求，电子设备100还可以利用测距算法1计算电子设备100与电子设备201间的距离。一些实施例中，参考图6B，电子设备201发起UWB测量请求，电子设备201还可以利用单边双向算法1计算电子设备100与电子设备201间的距离。在一些实施例中，参考图6D，电子设备201发起UEB测量请求，电子设备201还可以利用单边双向算法2计算电子设备100与电子设备201间的距离。此处不做具体限定。
在本申请实施例中，电子设备(例如，电子设备100)的软件系统可以采用分层架构，事件驱动架构，微核架构，微服务架构，或云架构。本申请实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例，示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。
参见图10A，图10A示出了本申请实施例示例性提供的电子设备的软件结构框图。该电子设备可以在通过UWB定位技术确定附近设备的方位参数(例如距离、信号AOA及RRSI)，进而根据多个附近设备的方位参数，确定用户意图唤醒或配对连接的目标设备。电子设备可以通过UWB、蓝牙、WLAN和红外线中的一种或多种无线通信协议和目标设备建立无线通信连接，并进行数据传输。
如图10A所示，分层架构将软件分成若干个层，每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中，可以将Android系统从上至下分为应用程序层，应用程序框架层，协议栈，硬件抽象层(hardware abstraction layer，HAL)层以及内核层(kernel)。其中：
应用程序层包括一系列应用程序包，例如智能家居，蓝牙，WLAN等等。还可以包括相机，图库，通话，音乐，视频等应用程序。
其中，智能家居APP是能够对家居中的各种智能家居设备进行选择和控制的软件程序， 安装在用户使用的电子设备上。智能家居APP可以是电子设备出厂时已安装的应用，也可以是用户在使用电子设备的过程中从网络下载或从其他设备获取的应用。智能家居APP可以参考图7A至图7G实施例的相关描述。
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface，API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。
如图10A所示，应用程序框架层主要可以包括API和系统服务(System Server)。其中，API用于实现应用程序层和协议栈、HAL层、内核层(kernel)之间的通信。例如，可提供“智能家居”和HAL层及内核层(kernel)之间的通信等。API可以包括UWB API、蓝牙API、WLAN API、红外线API中的一项或多项，相应的，系统服务可以包括UWB服务、蓝牙服务、WLAN服务、红外线服务中的一项或多项。电子设备100可以通过调用UWB API、蓝牙API、WLAN API、红外线API中的一项或多项调用相应的系统服务，来探测电子设备100附近设备的方位参数。还可以通过调用UWB API、蓝牙API、WLAN API、红外线API中的一项或多项调用相应的系统服务，来与附近设备建立无线通信连接，以及进行数据传输。
其中，UWB服务具体可以包括一或多项服务，例如UWB定位服务。UWB定位服务可以包括方位参数测量，其中，方位参数测量包括距离测量、AOA测量、RRSI测量中的一或多项。例如，电子设备100通过UWB API调用UWB定位服务，来探测电子设备100附近设备的方位参数。
本申请实施例中，应用程序框架层还可新增运动探测组件(motion detector)，用于获取到的输入事件进行逻辑判断，识别输入事件的类型。例如，通过输入事件中包括的触摸坐标，触摸操作的时间戳等信息，判断该输入事件为指关节触摸事件或指肚触摸事件等。同时，运动探测组件还可记录输入事件的轨迹，并判定输入事件的手势规律，根据不同的手势，响应不同的操作。例如，通过输入事件中包括的电子设备在三轴上的加速度(例如，用户手指敲击电子设备后壳或侧边框)等信息，判断该输入事件为敲击事件等。例如，通过输入事件中包括的电子设备的姿态变化和姿态变化的时间戳(例如，用户手持电子设备进行指向操作)等信息，判断该输入事件为指向事件等。
协议栈定义了多个应用(profile)和核心协议(protocol)，每个profile定义了各自相应的消息格式与应用规则。(profile)可以是UWB服务(Application)，还可以是蓝牙服务、WLAN服务等等。示例性的，如图9C所示，协议栈可以包括UWB协议栈、UWB硬件服务模块、UWB时间管理模块。其中，UWB协议栈可以定义UWB收发信号(包括接收信号和发送信号)的消息格式、UWB收发信号的数据格式转换、UWB定位算法等，UWB硬件服务模块可以用于管理UWB固件的生命周期以及与UWB固件配套的软件更新，UWB时间管理模块可以用于记录和管理UWB收发信号的时间戳。在一些实施例中，协议栈还可以包括蓝牙协议栈、WLAN协议栈、红外线协议栈中的一或多项。例如，应用框架层的UWB定位服务发送UWB测量指令给UWB协议栈，指示UWB协议栈进行方位参数的测量。
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层可以包含UWB驱动、蓝牙驱动、WLAN驱动中的一或多项，还可以包括显示驱动，摄像头驱动，音频驱动，传感器驱动等等。HAL层 及内核层(kernel)用于响应于应用程序框架层中系统服务调用的功能执行对应的操作。例如，响应于UWB定位服务调用UWB协议栈发送的UWB测量指令，UWB芯片驱动通过硬件设备(例如UWB芯片)发送UWB测量请求。
在本申请示例中，该软件结构框架可以在用户的电子设备(例如上述实施例的电子设备100、电子设备500)上，也可以在智能家居设备(例如上述实施例的电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203、电子设备204等等)上。
其中，语音唤醒场景下，UWB定位发起设备是智能家居设备(例如电子设备201)。在配对连接场景下，UWB定位发起设备可以是用户的电子设备(例如电子设备201)，也可以是智能家居设备(例如电子设备201)。
下面以图8A实施例中的配对连接场景为例，示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。
加速度传感器检测到敲击操作(例如敲击电子设备后壳，或者敲击电子设备侧边框)，相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将敲击操作加工成原始输入事件(包括敲击位置，敲击操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件，识别该输入事件为对智能家居设备(例如电子设备201)的配对连接。智能家居应用调用应用框架层的UWB API，以启动UWB定位服务。UWB定位服务通过调用UWB协议栈向HAL层中的UWB HAL接口发送UWB测量指令。UWB HAL接口向内核层发送UWB测量请求，内核层根据上述UWB测量请求通过调用UWB芯片驱动，来驱动UWB芯片广播测量请求(例如第一测量请求)，同时利用UWB时间管理模块记录UWB测量请求发送时间戳。
在本申请的一些实施例中，参考8B，电子设备100采用测距算法3进行距离测量，电子设备100发起UWB定位测量，电子设备100进行方位参数的计算。UWB芯片通过天线发送测量请求(例如第一测量请求)后，当UWB芯片通过天线接收到测量响应(例如第一测量响应)时，相应的测量参数被发给内核层，测量参数可以包括上述测量响应中携带的时间戳(例如，第一测量请求的接收时刻和第一测量响应的发送时刻)、第一测量响应的接收时刻、上述测量响应在不同天线上相位差信息以及上述测量响应的RSSI。内核层通过调用UWB HAL接口将上述测量参数发送给UWB协议栈，UWB协议栈通过UWB定位测量算法(例如距离测量算法，AOA测量算法，RRSI测量算法)对上述测量参数进行处理后，确定上述电子设备201的方位参数(例如距离，信号AOA及RRSI)。例如，根据测量响应中携带的时间戳、第一测量响应的接收时刻以及UWB时间管理模块记录的第一测量请求的发送时刻，利用测距算法3确定电子设备201的距离。UWB协议栈将上述电子设备201的方位参数发送至应用框架层的UWB服务，UWB服务可以根据多个附近设备的方位参数判断目标设备为电子设备201。
在一些实施例中，应用框架层的UWB服务确定目标设备后通过调用UWB协议栈，将第一连接请求发送至HAL和内核层，内核层的UWB芯片驱动UWB芯片向电子设备201发送上述连接请求，以请求建立UWB通信连接，并进行数据传输。可选的，应用框架层的UWB服务还可以调用蓝牙服务、WLAN服务或红外线服务，向电子设备201发送第一连接请求。例如，UWB服务启动蓝牙服务，通过蓝牙服务调用蓝牙协议栈，从而将第一连 接请求发送至HAL和内核层，内核层的蓝牙芯片驱动蓝牙芯片将第一连接请求发送至电子设备201，以请求建立蓝牙通信连接，并进行数据传输。
示例性的，参考图10B，是本申请实施例示例性地提供的另一种电子设备的UWB软件框架图。该软件框架可以在用户的电子设备(例如上述实施例的电子设备100、电子设备500)上，也可以在智能家居设备(例如上述实施例的电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203、电子设备204等等)上。
结合图10A及图10B，下面描述各个模块之间的对应关系。
图10B中应用程序层(Android Applications)对应于图10A中应用程序层；
图10B中的(Vendor UWB Frameworks APIs)对应于图10A中应用程序框架层的API调用；
图10B中的测距服务层(Ranging Service Layer)对应于图10A中应用程序框架层的系统服务；
图10B中的UWB控制接口协议栈(UCI stack)对应于图10A中的UWB协议栈；
图10B中的UWB固件下载(HBCI UWB FW download)对应于图10A中的UWB管理模块；
图10B中的时间管理模块(TML)对应于图10A中的UWB时间管理模块；
图10B中的同步外设接口驱动(SPI driver)对应于图10A中的内核层；
图10B中的Hwlios HW是本申请实施例示例性地提供的一种UWB芯片。
这里，图10B中各层的功能可以参考图10A所示的软件框架实施例，此处不再赘述。
下面介绍本申请中的硬件系统架构。本申请实施例中，电子设备(例如，电子设备100)具备至少两个UWB天线时，可以利用UWB定位技术进行AOA测量。电子设备具备至少一个UWB天线时，可以实现距离测量和RRSI测量。
如图10C所示，本申请实施例示例性地提供了一种硬件系统架构，可以包括但不限于应用处理器901、UWB芯片902、射频模块(包括射频模块903A和射频模块903B)、天线(天线904A和天线904B)。
其中，射频模块903A和射频模块903B的第一端均与UWB芯片902连接，射频模块903A的第二端与天线904A(例如图3E所示的天线A)连接，射频模块903B的第二端与天线904B(例如图3E所示的天线C)连接。其中，为支持UWB AOA测量，天线904A和天线904B的距离小于半波长，在一些实施例中，图10C所示的硬件系统还包括其他一或多个射频模块的第一端与UWB芯片902连接，且上述一或多个射频模块的第二端分别连接一个UWB天线。
在一些实施例中，当电子设备(例如，电子设备201)接收并检测到用户的唤醒词，或者当电子设备(例如，电子设备100)检测到用户的第一用户操作，应用处理器901启动UWB定位服务，通过UWB定位服务向UWB芯片902发送测量指令，指示UWB芯片902进行到方位参数的测量。根据上述测量指令，UWB芯片902通过射频模块(射频模块903A和/或射频模块903B)和对应的天线广播UWB测量请求。
本申请实施例中，电子设备可以通过UWB芯片及其对应的天线进行距离测量、AOA测量、RRSI测量。电子设备也可以通过UWB芯片及其对应的天线进行无线数据传输。
在一些实施例中，上述图10C所示的硬件系统还可以包括蓝牙芯片905、WLAN芯片906、红外线芯片907中的一或多个，蓝牙芯片905、WLAN芯片906、红外线芯片907中任一个芯片通过一或多个射频模块连接至天线。其中，UWB芯片902、蓝牙芯片905、WLAN芯片906、红外线芯片907中任意两个芯片通过射频模块连接的天线可以复用，也可以相互独立。电子设备也可以通过蓝牙芯片905、WLAN芯片906、红外线芯片907中的一或多项进行无线数据传输。在一些实施例中，UWB芯片902可以集成到SOC上，UWB芯片902也可以与其他芯片(例如，蓝牙芯片905)集成为一体。
在本申请示例中，该硬件系统架构可以在用户的电子设备(例如上述实施例的电子设备100、电子设备500)上，也可以在智能家居设备(例如上述实施例的电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203、电子设备204等等)上。
下面介绍本申请中UWB芯片系统架构900。
如图10D所示，本申请实施例提供了一种UWB芯片系统架构900，可以包括但不限于应用处理器(AP)901和UWB芯片902。其中，应用处理器901中可以包括有UWB定位服务901A和UWB协议栈901B，UWB芯片902中可以包括有UWB定位管理模块902A、UWB定位测量模块902B。其中，该UWB定位服务901A可以是需要距离测量、AOA测量和/或RRSI测量的功能/服务/应用。
在本申请示例中，该UWB芯片系统900可以在用户的电子设备(例如上述实施例的电子设备100、电子设备500)上，或者智能家居设备(例如上述实施例的电子设备201、电子设备202、电子设备203、电子设备204等等)上。
以图8A实施例中的配对连接场景为例，针对UWB定位发起设备(例如电子设备100)，该UWB芯片系统900中可以实现如下步骤：
1、UWB定位服务901A发送启动指令给UWB协议栈901B，指示UWB协议栈901B进行UWB定位，即启动方位参数的测量(包括距离测量，AOA测量，RRSI测量)。
2、UWB协议栈901B可以发送UWB定位广播指令给UWB定位管理模块902A，指示UWB定位管理模块902A进行定位广播。
3、UWB定位管理模块902A可以触发UWB定位测量模块902B广播UWB定位测量请求(例如第三测量请求)。
4、UWB定位测量模块902B可以在接收到附近设备(例如，电子设备201)发送的UWB定位测量响应(例如第三测量响应)后，将测量响应发送给UWB定位管理模块901A。
5、UWB定位管理模块901A在接收到测量响应后，可以根据测量响应解析出上述测量请求的接收时刻、上述测量响应的发送时刻、相位差信息、测量响应的RSSI等测量参数。然后，UWB定位管理模块901A可以将上述测量参数发送给UWB定位协议栈901B。
6、UWB定位协议栈901B在接收到上述测量参数后，通过UWB定位算法确定附近设备的方为参数(包括通距离测量算法确定距离，通过AOA测量算法确定信号AOA，以及根据上述距离和测量响应的RSSI，通过RRSI可以确定电子设备201是否有遮挡)。
7、UWB协议栈901B在计算出方位参数后，可以将该附近设备的方位参数发送给UWB定位服务901A。
8、UWB定位服务901A可以根据多个附近设备的方位参数的判定目标设备。
基于前述实施例，接下来介绍本申请实施例提供的设备控制方法。所述设备控制方法包括但不限于步骤S601至步骤S603，其中：
S601、第二设备发送第一消息；第一消息携带第二设备的标识；第三设备发送第二消息；第二消息携带第三设备的标识；
其中，第二设备可以是前述实施例中的电子设备201，第三设备可以是前述实施例中的电子设备202或电子设备203，第二设备的标识可以是电子设备201的ID1，第三设备的标识可以是电子设备202的身份标识。参考图2的相关实施例，电子设备201、电子设备202或电子设备203可以是电视机、音箱、空调等智能家居设备。
在一些实施例中，可以由第一设备发起定位测量，并由第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA，上述第一消息和第二消息可以是图5A相关实施例中的UWB测量请求，还可以是图5C和图5F相关实施例中的第一测量请求；上述第一消息和第二消息还可以是图8C相关实施例中的第四测量响应。在一些实施例中，可以由第二设备和第三设备发起定位测量，并由第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA，上述第一消息和第二消息可以是图9A相关实施例中的UWB测量请求，还可以是9C相关实施例中的第六测量请求。
S602、第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA，第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA；
其中，第一设备可以是前述实施例中的电子设备100，第一设备的标识可以是电子设备100的ID2。参考图2的相关实施例，电子设备100可以是智能手机、智能手环、平板等便携的终端设备。如何确定信号AOA可以参考图5D的相关实施例，此处不再赘述。
S603、第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息；第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息执行响应操作。
参考图5A至图5F，针对语音交互场景，可以由第一设备(例如电子设备100)发起定位测量，并由第一设备(电子设备100)确定第二设备(电子设备201)和第三设备(例如电子设备202)的信号AOA。
在一些实施例中，上述第二设备发送第一消息，包括：第二设备响应于检测到的语音命令，发送第一消息；上述第三设备发送第二消息，包括：第三设备响应于检测到的语音命令，发送第二消息；上述第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息执行响应操作，包括：第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息和语音命令输出响应信息。上述第一消息和第二消息可以是图5A相关实施例中的UWB测量请求，还可以是图5C和图5F相关实施例中的第一测量请求。上述第三消息可以是图5A相关实施例中的第一指示信息。
针对语音交互场景，还可以由第一设备发起定位测量，并由第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA。
在一些实施例中，上述第二设备发送第一消息之前，以及第三设备发送第二消息之前，还包括：第一设备响应于检测到的语音指令发送第四消息，第四消息携带第一设备的标识；上述第二设备发送第一消息，包括：第二设备基于第四消息，向第一设备发送第一消息；上述第三设备发送第二消息，包括：第三设备基于第四消息，向第一设备发送第二消息；上述第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息执行响应操作，包括：第二设备响应于接收到的第三消息和语音命令输出响应信息。
可以理解，在智能家居场景下，用户意图通过语音控制智能家居设备(例如电视、音箱)中的目标设备时，用户可以将手机指向目标设备，并说出语音命令。智能家居设备或用户的手机检测到用户的语音命令时，可以发起信号AOA的测量，并由用户的手机计算各智能家居设备的信号AOA。进而手机可以根据各智能家居设备的信号AOA确定用户的目标设备。通过简易的操作即可准确控制多个智能家居设备中的一个。
参考图8A至图8C，针对配对连接场景，可以由第一设备发起定位测量，并由第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA。
在一些实施例中，上述第二设备发送第一消息之前，以及第三设备发送第二消息之前，还包括：第一设备响应于检测到的第一用户操作发送第四消息，第四消息携带第一设备的标识；上述第二设备发送第一消息，包括：第二设备基于第四消息，向第一设备发送第一消息；上述第三设备发送第二消息，包括：第三设备基于第四消息，向第一设备发送第二消息。上述第四消息可以是图8A相关实施例中的UWB测量请求，还可以是图8C相关实施例中的第四测量请求。上述第一消息和第二消息可以是图8C相关实施例中的第四测量响应。在一种实现方式中，上述第三消息可以是图8A相关实施例中的连接请求，所述第三消息用于指示第二设备发送连接参数。
参考图9A至图9D，针对配对连接场景，可以由第二设备和第三设备发起定位测量，并由第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA，第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA，包括：响应于检测到的所述第一用户操作，上述第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的信号到达角AOA，基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的信号AOA。上述第一消息和第二消息可以是图9A相关实施例中的UWB测量请求，还可以是9C相关实施例中的第六测量请求。
可以理解，在智能家居场景下，用户意图将手机和智能家居设备(例如电视、音箱)中的目标设备进行配对连接时，用户可以将手机指向目标设备，并实施第一用户操作。在一种实现方式中，用户的手机检测到第一用户操作时，可以发起信号AOA的测量，并由手机计算各智能家居设备的信号AOA。在另一种实现方式中，各智能家居设备均定时发起定位测量，用户的手机检测到第一用户操作时，响应于各智能家居设备发送的定位测量，计算各智能家居设备的信号AOA。进而手机可以根据各智能家居设备的信号AOA确定用户的目标设备。通过简易的操作即可控制多个智能家居设备中的一个。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的距离；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，向第二设备发送第三消息。参考图5A至图5F、图8A至图8C以及图9A至图9D，第一设备(电子设备100)可以根据接收到的信号确定第一设备(电子设备100)与第二设备(电子设备201)或第三设备(电子设备202)的距离。这样，可以从信号AOA和距离两个维度来确定第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的接收信号强度指示RRSI；第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的RRSI；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离和第三设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，可以从信号AOA、距离和RRSI三个维度来确定第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。参考图5A至图5F、图8A至图8C以及图9A至图9D，第一设备(电子设备100)可以根据接收到的信号确定第一设备(电子设备100)与第二设备(电子设备201)或第三设备(电子设备202)的RRSI。这样，可以从信号AOA、距离、RRSI三个维度来确定第二设备和第三设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最接近0度的设备为第二设备时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。
具体的，第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最接近预设角度的设备为第二设备时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。其中，预设角度可以根据用于确定信号AOA的UWB天线在第一设备上的分布确定，具体的，可以参考前述图5D的相关实施例。例如，预设角度可以为0度、90度。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：当第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值，且第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最小的设备为第二设备时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值，且第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中距离最小的设备为第二设备时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。具体的，如何根据信号AOA和距离确定多个设备中的目标设备，可以参考图5G的相关实施例。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离和第三设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：当第二设备的RRSI大于预设RRSI，且第三设备的RRSI小于等于预设RRSI时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备的RRSI和第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于预设RRSI，且第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值时，第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中信号AOA最小的设备为第二设备，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，当第二设备的RRSI和第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于预设RRSI，且第二设备和第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值时，第一设备确定第二设备和第三设备中距离最小的设备为第二设备，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。具体的，如何根据信号AOA、距离、RRSI确定多个设备中的目标设备，可以参考图5G和图5H的相关实施例。
在一些实施例中，第二阈值等于第一阈值。例如第一阈值等于10度。在一些实施例中， 第二阈值不等于第一阈值。例如第一阈值等于25度，第二阈值等于20度。
本申请实施例中，第一设备发起定位测量且第一设备计算距离的测距算法，可以参考前述实施例中测距算法3和测距算法4。第二设备和第三设备发起定位测量且第一设备计算距离的测距算法，可以参考前述实施例中测距算法1和测距算法2。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的距离之前，还包括：第一设备接收到第一消息，向第二设备发送第五消息；第二设备接收到第五消息，向第一设备发送第六消息；第一设备接收到第二消息，向第二设备发送第七消息；第二设备接收到第七消息，向第一设备发送第八消息；第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的距离；上述第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的距离，包括：第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离；第一设备基于第二消息、第七消息和第八消息的收发时刻，确定第三设备的距离。
示例性，语音交互场景中，以图5E和图5F实施例所示的测距算法2为例，第二设备(例如电子设备201)发起测量，第一设备(例如电子设备100)进行距离计算。其中，第一消息可以是图5F实施例的第一测量请求，第五消息可以是图5F实施例的第一测量响应，第六消息可以是图5F实施例的第二测量响应。
示例性，配对连接场景中，以图9B和图9C实施例所示的测距算法2为例，第二设备(例如电子设备201)发起测量，第一设备(例如电子设备100)进行距离计算。其中，第一消息可以是图9C实施例的第六测量请求，第五消息可以是图5F实施例的第六测量响应，第六消息可以是图5F实施例的第七测量响应。
在一些实施例中，上述第二设备接收到第五消息之后，向第一设备发送第六消息之前，还包括：第一设备向第二设备发送第九消息；上述第二设备接收第九消息；第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息和第六消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离，包括：第一设备基于第一消息、第五消息、第六消息和第九消息的收发时刻，确定第二设备的距离。
示例性，语音交互场景中，以是图5B和图5C实施例所示的测距算法1为例，第二设备(例如电子设备201)发起测量，第一设备(例如电子设备100)进行距离计算。其中，第一消息可以是图5C实施例的第一测量请求，第五消息可以是图5C实施例的第一测量响应，第九消息可以是图5C实施例的第二测量请求，第六消息可以是图5C实施例的第二测量响应。示例性的，配对连接场景中，还可以参考图9D实施例中的测距算法1。
在一些实施例中，上述第六消息携带第二设备发送第一消息、接收第五消息、发送第六消息的时刻。
在一些实施例中，上述第六消息携带第二设备发送第一消息、接收第五消息、接收第九消息、发送第六消息的时刻。
可以理解，第一消息的发送时刻也可以由第一消息携带。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第四设备发送第十消息；第十消息携带第四设备的标识；第一设备基于接收到的第十消息确定第四设备的信号到达角AOA；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第 一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第三设备的信号AOA和第四设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息。
其中，第四设备可以是前述实施例中的电子设备202或电子设备203。在一些实施例中，可以由第一设备发起定位测量，并由第一设备确定第四设备的信号AOA，上述第十消息可以是图5A相关实施例中的UWB测量请求，还可以是图5C和图5F相关实施例中的第一测量请求；上述第十消息还可以是图8C相关实施例中的第四测量响应。在一些实施例中，可以由第四设备发起定位测量，并由第四设备确定第四设备的信号AOA，上述第十消息可以是图9A相关实施例中的UWB测量请求，还可以是9C相关实施例中的第六测量请求。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第十消息确定第四设备的距离和RRSI；上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第三设备的信号AOA和第三设备的距离，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，可以从信号AOA、距离、RRSI三个维度来确定第二设备、第三设备和第四设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。
在一些实施例中，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：第一设备基于接收到的第一消息确定第二设备的接收信号强度指示RRSI；上述第一设备基于接收到的第二消息确定第三设备的RRSI；第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA和第三设备的信号AOA，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离、第三设备的RRSI、第四设备的距离和第四设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息。这样，可以从信号AOA、距离、RRSI三个维度来确定第二设备、第三设备和第四设备中的目标设备，提高了准确控制多设备中的目标设备的可能性。
在一些实施例中，参考图5G，上述第一设备基于第二设备的信号AOA、第二设备的距离、第二设备的RRSI、第三设备的信号AOA、第三设备的距离、第三设备的RRSI、第四设备的距离和第四设备的RRSI，向第二设备发送第三消息，包括：第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中仅有第二设备的RRSI大于预设RRSI时，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备数量大于1时，确定第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备中，信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个设备；第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备数量等于零时，确定第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个设备，当两个设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值时，确定两个设备中信号AOA最小的设备为第二设备，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息；或者，第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备数量大于1时，确定第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备中，信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个设备；第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中RRSI大于预设RRSI的设备数量等于零时，确定第二设备、第三设备、第四设备中信号AOA最接近预设角度的两个设备，当两个设备的AOA差值小于等于第二阈值时，确定 两个设备中距离最小的设备为第二设备，第一设备向第二设备发送第三消息。具体的，如何根据信号AOA、距离、RRSI确定多个设备中的目标设备，可以参考图5G和图5H的相关实施例。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘)等。
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程，该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成，该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中，该程序在执行时，可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括：ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。

Claims (16)

  1. 一种设备控制方法，其特征在于，所述方法应用于通信系统，所述通信系统包括：第一设备、第二设备、第三设备，所述第一设备、所述第二设备和所述第三设备使用近距离无线通信技术通信，所述方法包括：
    所述第二设备发送第一消息；所述第一消息携带所述第二设备的标识；
    所述第三设备发送第二消息；所述第二消息携带所述第三设备的标识；
    所述第一设备基于接收到的所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的信号到达角AOA；所述第一设备基于接收到的所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的信号AOA；
    所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的信号AOA，向所述第二设备发送第三消息；
    所述第二设备响应于接收到的所述第三消息执行响应操作。
  2. 一种设备控制方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    所述第一设备接收所述第二设备发送的第一消息；所述第一消息携带所述第二设备的标识；
    所述第一设备接收所述第三设备发送的第二消息；所述第二消息携带所述第三设备的标识；
    所述第一设备基于所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的信号到达角AOA；所述第一设备基于所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的信号AOA；
    所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的信号AOA，向所述第二设备发送第三消息；所述第三消息用于指示所述第二设备执行响应操作。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一消息是所述第二设备响应于检测到的语音命令发送的；所述第二消息是所述第二设备响应于检测到的所述语音命令发送的；所述第三消息用于指示所述第二设备响应所述语音命令输出响应信息。
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备接收所述第二设备发送的第一消息之前，以及所述第一设备接收所述第三设备发送的第二消息之前，还包括：
    所述第一设备响应于检测到的第一用户操作发送第四消息，所述第四消息携带所述第一设备的标识；所述第一消息是所述第二设备基于所述第四消息发送的；所述第二消息是所述第三设备基于所述第四消息发送的。
  5. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的信号AOA，向所述第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：
    所述第一设备基于所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的距离；所述第一设备基于所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的距离；
    所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的信号AOA，向所述第 二设备发送第三消息，包括：
    所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA、所述第二设备的距离、所述第三设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的距离，向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的信号AOA，向所述第二设备发送第三消息之前，还包括：
    所述第一设备基于所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的接收信号强度指示RRSI；所述第一设备基于所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的RRSI；
    所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的信号AOA，向所述第二设备发送第三消息，包括：
    所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA、所述第二设备的距离、所述第二设备的RRSI、所述第三设备的信号AOA、所述第三设备的距离和所述第三设备的RRSI，向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息。
  7. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的信号AOA，向所述第二设备发送第三消息，包括：
    所述第一设备确定所述第二设备和所述第三设备中信号AOA最接近0度的设备为所述第二设备时，向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息。
  8. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA、所述第二设备的距离、所述第三设备的信号AOA和所述第三设备的距离，向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息，包括：
    当所述第二设备和所述第三设备的信号AOA差值大于第一阈值，且所述第一设备确定所述第二设备和所述第三设备中信号AOA最小的设备为所述第二设备时，向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息；
    或者，当所述第二设备和所述第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于第二阈值，且所述第一设备确定所述第二设备和所述第三设备中距离最小的设备为所述第二设备时，向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息。
  9. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备基于所述第二设备的信号AOA、所述第二设备的距离、所述第二设备的RRSI、所述第三设备的信号AOA、所述第三设备的距离和所述第三设备的RRSI，向所述第二设备发送第三消息，包括：
    当所述第二设备的RRSI大于预设RRSI，且所述第三设备的RRSI小于等于所述预设RRSI时，向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息；
    或者，当所述第二设备的RRSI和所述第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于所述预设RRSI，且所述第二设备和所述第三设备的信号AOA差值大于所述第一阈值时，所述第一设备确定所述第二设备和所述第三设备中信号AOA最小的设备为所述第二设备，并向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息；
    或者，当所述第二设备的RRSI和所述第三设备的RRSI均大于或均小于等于所述预设RRSI，且所述第二设备和所述第三设备的信号AOA差值小于等于所述第二阈值时，所述第一设备确定所述第二设备和所述第三设备中距离最小的设备为所述第二设备，并向所述第二设备发送所述第三消息。
  10. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备基于所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的距离；所述第一设备基于所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的距离之前，还包括：
    所述第一设备基于接收到的所述第一消息，向所述第二设备发送第五消息；
    所述第一设备接收所述第二设备发送的第六消息；
    所述第一设备基于接收到的所述第二消息，向所述第二设备发送第七消息；
    所述第一设备接收所述第三设备发送的第八消息；
    所述第一设备基于所述第一消息确定所述第二设备的距离；所述第一设备基于所述第二消息确定所述第三设备的距离，包括：
    所述第一设备基于所述第一消息、所述第五消息和所述第六消息的收发时刻，确定所述第二设备的距离；所述第一设备基于所述第二消息、所述第七消息和所述第八消息的收发时刻，确定所述第三设备的距离。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备接收所述第二设备发送的第六消息之前，还包括：
    所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第九消息；
    所述第一设备基于所述第一消息、所述第五消息和所述第六消息的收发时刻，确定所述第二设备的距离，包括：
    所述第一设备基于所述第一消息、所述第五消息、所述第六消息和所述第九消息的收发时刻，确定所述第二设备的距离。
  12. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第六消息携带所述第二设备发送所述第一消息、接收所述第五消息、发送所述第六消息的时刻。
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第六消息携带所述第二设备发送所述第一消息、接收所述第五消息、接收第九消息、发送所述第六消息的时刻。
  14. 一种终端，所述终端为第一设备，其特征在于，包括：处理器、近距离无线通信模块、存储器、以及一个或多个程序；其中，所述处理器和所述存储器耦合，所述处理器与所述近距离无线通信模块连接；所述一个或多个程序被存储在所述存储器中，所述一个或多个程序包括指令，所述指令用于执行如权利要求2-13所述的方法。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的终端，其特征在于，所述终端还包括：两个UWB天线，所 述近距离无线通信模块为UWB通信模块，所述UWB通信模块与所述两个UWB天线连接；
    所述近距离无线通信模块，用于通过所述两个UWB天线接收所述第二设备发送的第一消息；
    所述近距离无线通信模块，用于通过所述两个UWB天线接收所述第三设备发送的第二消息；
    所述处理器，用于基于所述第一消息在所述两个UWB天线上的相位差确定所述第二设备的信号到达角AOA；
    所述处理器，用于基于所述第二消息在所述两个UWB天线上的相位差确定所述第三设备的信号AOA。
  16. 一种计算机可读介质，用于存储一个或多个程序，其中所述一个或多个程序被配置为被所述一个或多个处理器执行，所述一个或多个程序包括指令，所述指令用于执行如权利要求2-13所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/105455 2020-07-09 2021-07-09 一种设备控制方法及相关装置 WO2022007944A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21837967.5A EP4171135A4 (en) 2020-07-09 2021-07-09 APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010658726.X 2020-07-09
CN202010658726.XA CN113921002A (zh) 2020-07-09 2020-07-09 一种设备控制方法及相关装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022007944A1 true WO2022007944A1 (zh) 2022-01-13

Family

ID=79232121

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/105455 WO2022007944A1 (zh) 2020-07-09 2021-07-09 一种设备控制方法及相关装置

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4171135A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN113921002A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022007944A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023165454A1 (zh) * 2022-03-02 2023-09-07 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和装置

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20230009076A (ko) * 2021-07-08 2023-01-17 삼성전자주식회사 Uwb 통신을 위한 방법 및 장치
CN116781104A (zh) * 2022-03-07 2023-09-19 华为技术有限公司 基于超带宽的信息反馈方法及装置
CN116052666A (zh) * 2023-02-21 2023-05-02 之江实验室 语音消息处理方法、装置、系统、电子装置和存储介质

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009303014A (ja) * 2008-06-16 2009-12-24 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> 制御装置、制御方法、制御プログラムおよび制御プログラムを記録した記録媒体
CN106936669A (zh) * 2015-12-31 2017-07-07 美的集团股份有限公司 基于移动终端的智能家电的定位系统及方法
CN107690679A (zh) * 2015-06-02 2018-02-13 高通技术国际有限公司 指向、访问和控制建筑物内部中的电器设备和其它对象的直观方式
CN111212182A (zh) * 2019-12-01 2020-05-29 深圳市纽瑞芯科技有限公司 用嵌uwb模块的手机直接遥控uwb设备的方法及装置

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9332523B2 (en) * 2013-05-10 2016-05-03 Qualcomm, Incorporated Systems and methods of offloaded positioning for determining location of WLAN nodes
EP3573355A1 (en) * 2018-05-24 2019-11-27 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Device for wireless communication with other devices
CN111091828B (zh) * 2019-12-31 2023-02-14 华为技术有限公司 语音唤醒方法、设备及系统

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009303014A (ja) * 2008-06-16 2009-12-24 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> 制御装置、制御方法、制御プログラムおよび制御プログラムを記録した記録媒体
CN107690679A (zh) * 2015-06-02 2018-02-13 高通技术国际有限公司 指向、访问和控制建筑物内部中的电器设备和其它对象的直观方式
CN106936669A (zh) * 2015-12-31 2017-07-07 美的集团股份有限公司 基于移动终端的智能家电的定位系统及方法
CN111212182A (zh) * 2019-12-01 2020-05-29 深圳市纽瑞芯科技有限公司 用嵌uwb模块的手机直接遥控uwb设备的方法及装置

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4171135A4

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023165454A1 (zh) * 2022-03-02 2023-09-07 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113921002A (zh) 2022-01-11
EP4171135A4 (en) 2023-12-06
EP4171135A1 (en) 2023-04-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021000876A1 (zh) 一种语音控制方法、电子设备及系统
WO2021008534A1 (zh) 一种语音唤醒的方法和电子设备
WO2021052214A1 (zh) 一种手势交互方法、装置及终端设备
CN110622123B (zh) 一种显示方法及装置
WO2020224449A1 (zh) 一种分屏显示的操作方法及电子设备
WO2022007944A1 (zh) 一种设备控制方法及相关装置
WO2020244623A1 (zh) 一种空鼠模式实现方法及相关设备
CN111369988A (zh) 一种语音唤醒方法及电子设备
WO2022028537A1 (zh) 一种设备识别方法及相关装置
WO2020259542A1 (zh) 一种显示设备的控制方法及相关装置
WO2021023046A1 (zh) 一种电子设备控制方法及一种电子设备
CN113923230B (zh) 数据同步方法、电子设备和计算机可读存储介质
WO2020168968A1 (zh) 一种具有折叠屏的电子设备的控制方法及电子设备
WO2021017909A1 (zh) 一种通过nfc标签实现功能的方法、电子设备及系统
WO2021036776A1 (zh) 一种无线充电方法及电子设备
WO2021000817A1 (zh) 环境音处理方法及相关装置
WO2022033320A1 (zh) 蓝牙通信方法、终端设备及计算机可读存储介质
WO2022042770A1 (zh) 控制通信服务状态的方法、终端设备和可读存储介质
WO2021190314A1 (zh) 触控屏的滑动响应控制方法及装置、电子设备
CN114079691B (zh) 一种设备识别方法及相关装置
WO2022166618A1 (zh) 一种投屏的方法和电子设备
WO2022161077A1 (zh) 语音控制方法和电子设备
WO2021218544A1 (zh) 一种提供无线上网的系统、方法及电子设备
WO2021043250A1 (zh) 一种蓝牙通信方法及相关装置
WO2022143310A1 (zh) 一种双路投屏的方法及电子设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21837967

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021837967

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230118

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE